JP7120371B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, technical improvements are made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (eg, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to improve the enjoyment of the games, reduce the processing load of the gaming machines, simplify control, and provide more sound games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[form]
a plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area;
a game value imparting means electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and executing a process for imparting a game value to a game;
a payout means electrically connected to the game value imparting means and executing a payout process for paying out game balls;
a process executing means electrically connected to the game value imparting means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals and executing a predetermined process different from the payout process ;
A gaming machine comprising
The game value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information that is information used in a process for imparting a game value to the game and is referenced for detection by the predetermined detection means;
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference data stored in the first reference information storage means a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on ball entry information, which is information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detecting means, to the processing executing means;
with
The processing execution means is
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value imparting means;
execution means for executing the predetermined processing based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage unit for storing processing result information, which is information about a processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution unit;
with
The game value imparting means and the process execution means are operated by the same power source for the gaming machine,
This game machine is
an effect display means that is visible from the front of the game machine and displays a game round effect that is executed for each game time, which is one unit of processing for announcing the result of a predetermined lottery process;
means for outputting the processing result information to the effect display means;
with
The processing execution means is configured so as not to be able to rewrite the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means of the game value provision means,
The game value imparting means cannot directly change the processing result information stored in the processing result information storage means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above aspect, simplification of the control of the gaming machine can be realized.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the electric accessory open lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main controller and the structure of an inspection machine in detail. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the content of processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of an input port provided in a main MPU; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining ball-entering detection processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing entering ball determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the presence/absence of a hit ball is detected; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a CPU of a game history management chip; It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main-control apparatus and the structure of an inspection machine with which the pachinko machine of aspect 6 of 1st Embodiment is provided. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the content of processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 6 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main-control apparatus and the structure of an inspection machine with which the pachinko machine of aspect 7 of 1st Embodiment is provided. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 7 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 11 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an overview of processing in a main MPU in aspect 11 of the first embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 12 of 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the electric accessory open lottery. It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment performs. It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of a comparative example performs. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through gates. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment performs. 4 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing executed in the MPU of the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the sound emission control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of modification 2 of a 2nd embodiment performs. It is a timing chart explaining an outline of processing which a pachinko machine of modification 3 of a 2nd embodiment performs. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a third embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 1st starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for 2nd starting openings. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an allocation table; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the electric accessory open lottery. It is an explanatory view explaining a variable prize winning mechanism. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the first big winning hole. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the non-V winning area of the second big winning hole. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the V winning area of the second big winning hole. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening and closing pattern of the first opening and closing door and the second opening and closing door in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot and the opening and closing pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening-and-closing pattern of the 1st opening-and-closing door and the 2nd opening-and-closing door in the opening-and-closing execution mode performed with the second kind jackpot as a trigger, and the opening-and-closing pattern concerned. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for start mouths. It is a flow chart which shows first decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; It is an explanatory view for explaining a variable winning mechanism in Modification 1 of the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a variable winning mechanism in Modification 2 of the third embodiment. As a modification 3 of the third embodiment, an example of the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door and the second opening/closing door in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern will be described. It is an explanatory diagram for. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variable winning mechanism as a modification 4 of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening-and-closing pattern of an opening-and-closing door, and the said opening-and-closing pattern as the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variable winning mechanism in Modification 7 of the third embodiment.

An embodiment of a game machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Applies to other configurations:
E. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") according to the first embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided for detecting a dynamic operation amount based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material. This board box is configured to leave traces of opening and closing. For example, a seal is affixed to a portion that can be opened and closed, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as "opened" appear.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 in which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls. In this embodiment, as the general prize winning opening 32, three general prize winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a is also referred to as the first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b as the second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c as the third winning opening 32c.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first winning port 32a, the second winning port 32b, the third winning port 32c, the big winning port 36a, and the game in which the ball enters the out port 43 The balls are configured to merge into a discharge passage provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting the game balls. As will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 by detecting the game balls with the ejection path detection sensor.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing numbers 1 to 8. As shown in FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game round is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and displays the first result display section 37a or the second result for each game round. In either one of the display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stop-displayed so that the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 .

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when the CPU 62x executes the programs recorded in the ROM 63. and an input/output port 62a. The MPU 62 further includes a game history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65 .

The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information to be described later based on the information on the game ball entering the start hole, winning hole, and gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as "ball entry hole"). do. The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting game history information stored in the game history management chip 300 to a later-described inspection machine. Details of the game history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described later.

The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element.

An input side of the MPU 62 is connected with a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, in this embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor 87, and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period when a power failure occurs or the power switch is turned off.

Also, the input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a ball entry detection sensor provided at each ball entrance. Specifically, a large winning opening detection sensor 44a that detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 36a, a first starting opening detection sensor 44b that detects a gaming ball that has entered the first starting opening 33, A second starting hole detection sensor 44c for detecting a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, a first winning hole detecting sensor 44d for detecting a game ball entering the first winning hole 32a, and a second winning hole 32b. A second winning hole detection sensor 44e that detects a game ball that has entered a game ball, a third winning hole detection sensor 44f that detects a game ball that has entered the third winning hole 32c, and a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35. A through gate detection sensor 44g for detection and a discharge passage detection sensor 44h for detecting game balls passing through the discharge passage are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the starting opening or the winning opening, and whether the game ball has passed through the through gate or the discharge passage. or not. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34, and a main display. 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63 . Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 made of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and controls the operation of the speaker 46. , and controls the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. Various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display section 45, the design display of the design display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63, resulting in a jackpot. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not it occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not it occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. A variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for collation with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. A winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to when the jackpot lottery is held in the probability mode.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 7(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 7(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), five values of 0 to 4 are set in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, although not adopted in the hit/fail table in the present embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the present embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode described above is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8( a ), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33 are 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state is completed, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary item open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary item open lottery.

FIG. 9(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 9(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 that becomes the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main controller 60 and the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The MPU 62, CPU 62x, ROM 63 and RAM 64 are hereinafter also referred to as main MPU 62, main CPU 62x, main ROM 63 and main RAM 64, respectively.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and an arithmetic execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (prize ball number data) when the game balls enter each ball entering portion is stored. In this embodiment, the following number of prize balls data is stored in the number of prize balls data storage area.
· Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the first start hole 33 (first start hole prize ball number P ₁ ): 3
- The number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second start hole 34 (second start hole prize ball number P ₂ ): 3
- Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the first prize hole 32a (number of prize balls in the first prize hole P _N1 ): 10
- Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the second winning hole 32b (second winning hole prize ball number P _N2 ): 10
- Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the third prize opening 32c (number of prize balls in the third prize opening P _N3 ): 10
- The number of game balls paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the big winning hole 36a (large winning hole prize ball number P _S ): 15

By referring to the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63, the main side MPU 62 pays out game balls as prize balls when the game balls enter each ball entering section. Determine the number of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The computation execution condition storage area stores computation execution conditions that are conditions for the game history management chip 300 to start computation for calculating game history information. In this embodiment, it is stored as a calculation execution condition that the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500 pieces. The arithmetic execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The game history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various kinds of game history information based on the information on the game balls entering each ball entrance and stores the calculated game history information. The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information from the CPU 62x into each ball entry hole, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls entered into each ball entry hole, and a main side ROM 63. Winning ball number data storage memory 306 for storing the winning ball number data obtained from the main ROM 63, calculation execution condition storage memory 307 for storing calculation execution conditions obtained from the main ROM 63, and overall control of the game history management chip 300 and calculating game history information based on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance and the number of winning balls set in each ball entrance, triggered by the establishment of the calculation execution condition; and a calculation result storage memory 309 for storing the game history information obtained.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10 . In this embodiment, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 .

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a game history management chip 300. A display unit 328 for displaying the received game history information and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320. As shown in FIG.

The buffer 302 is provided between the CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and the register 304, and acquires ball entry information at each ball entrance from the CPU 62x. Specifically, the buffer 302 is provided with a plurality of bits corresponding to each ball entrance, and the CPU 62x turns ON ("1 ”). For example, when the CPU 62x determines that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 33, the bit corresponding to the first starting hole 33 in the buffer 302 is turned ON (“1”).

The buffer 302 is also provided with bits for grasping the game mode and the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the game ball enters each ball entrance (hereinafter also referred to as the game state). In this embodiment, a bit for determining whether or not the normal mode is in progress (not in the high probability mode, not in the high frequency support mode, and not in the opening/closing execution mode), and whether or not the high probability mode is on. a bit for determining whether the high-frequency support mode is on, a bit for determining whether the open/close execution mode is on, and the upper limit of the first pending number A bit for determining whether it is during the period of value, a bit for determining whether it is during the period when the second reserved number is the upper limit value, and the front door frame 14 is open A bit for judging whether or not there is, and a bit for judging whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error, such as a trouble such as a failure, are provided. For example, when the CPU 62x determines that it is in the normal mode at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33, it turns ON ("1 ”).

The register 304 stores the number of game balls entering each ball entrance. Specifically, the register 304 is composed of a plurality of counters corresponding to each ball entry port. ), 1 is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the bit determined to have the entry information. Note that, in this embodiment, the register 304 is configured by a non-volatile register capable of retaining memory even when the power supply is cut off.

In this embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by each counter corresponding to each entrance.
・The number of game balls entering the big winning hole 36a = the number of balls entering the big winning hole _NS
・ Number of game balls entering the first starting hole 33 = Number of balls entering the first starting hole N ₁
· The number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 = the number of balls entering the second starting port N ₂
・The number of game balls entering the first winning hole 32a = Number of balls entering the first winning hole N _N1
・The number of game balls entering the second winning hole 32b = the number of balls entering the second winning hole N _N2
・The number of game balls entering the third winning hole 32c = the number of balls entering the third winning hole N _N3
・The number of game balls that passed through the through gate 35 = the number of through gate passing N _G
・The number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage = the number of balls that have passed through the discharge passage N _OUT
Incidentally, as described above, the discharge passage passage number N _OUT coincides with the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of game balls entering each ball entrance for each game state.
・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during normal mode ・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during high probability mode ・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during high frequency support mode The number of game balls ・The number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during the open/close execution mode ・The game balls that entered the first start opening 33 during the period when the first reserved number is the upper limit value during the normal mode・The number of game balls that entered the second starting port 34 during the period in which the second reservation number is the upper limit during the normal mode ・The game that entered each ball entrance while the front door frame 14 was open Number of balls ・Number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during the error

For example, it is determined that the bit corresponding to the first starting port 33 of the buffer 302 has ball entry information (the bit is ON), and the information is in the bit that determines whether or not the normal mode is in progress. If it is determined that there is (the bit is ON), the value of the first start opening number counter, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 33, is set to 1. is added, and 1 is added to the value of the number counter of the number of balls entering the first starting hole during the normal mode, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls entered into the first starting hole 33 during the normal mode. be.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 . In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the memory for storing number of prize balls data 306 are the same as the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the main ROM 63 .

The calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 . The calculation execution condition is a condition for starting the calculation for calculating the game history information, as described above. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is set to start calculation for calculating the game history information each time the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500 pieces. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62 x and stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 . Therefore, the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is the same as the content of the calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 . In addition, as a calculation execution condition, the number of game balls that have passed through or entered a passage other than the discharge passage may be stored as a reference, or a number other than 500 may be stored as a reference.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the computation execution condition stored in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied, and when it is determined that the computation execution condition is satisfied, the CPU 308 stores the number of prize balls data in the memory 306. and the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304, various game history information is calculated. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following values as the game history information each time the value of the discharge passage passing number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500.

・Ratio of role = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by action of role / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls = (N ₂ × _{P 2} +NS × _PS )/(N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S )
・Continuous role ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by continuous role operation/Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls = (N _S × _PS )/(N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3 +N ₁ ×P ₁ +N ₂ ×P ₂ + _{NS ×P S )}
・Ball output rate (total)
=Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls/Number of game balls shot to the game board 30 =(N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3 +N ₁ ×P ₁ +N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S )/N _OUT

The basis for calculating the above values is as follows.
・Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the role = The number of prize balls paid out by the operation of the electric role 34a as the normal electric role and the variable winning device 36 as the special electric role Number of game balls =Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 34 and the big winning hole 36a =N ₂ × _{P 2} +NS × _PS
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the continuous accessory operation = The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the variable winning device 36 as the special electric accessory = To the big winning opening 36a The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the number of game balls entered = N _S × P _S
・The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c =N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3
・Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls = Based on the number of game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34 and the big winning hole 36a The number of game balls paid out as prize balls = N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of game balls entered into each ball entry portion counted for each game state.

・ Payout ratio (during normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during the normal mode / Based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during the normal mode The number of game balls paid out as prize balls + the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third prize openings 32a to 32c during the normal mode. Ball rate (during normal mode)
=Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode/Number of game balls fired to game board 30 during normal mode/ball output rate (during high-frequency support mode)
=Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during high-frequency support mode/Number of game balls fired to game board 30 during high-frequency support mode · BY (during normal mode)
= The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c during the normal mode + the first reserved number during the normal mode is the upper limit. The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 during the period + the second start port during the period when the second reserved number is the upper limit value during the normal mode Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering 34 / Number of game balls shot to game board 30 during normal mode · BY _MIN (during normal mode)
= the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c during the normal mode/the number of game balls launched to the game board 30 during the normal mode・Ball entry rate while the front door frame is open = Number of game balls entering each ball entrance while the front door frame 14 is open/Number of game balls launched to the game board 30 Ball entry rate during errors = Number of game balls entered into each ball entrance during error/Number of game balls launched to game board 30 Note that the above-mentioned game history information is an example, and configuration for calculating game history information other than these may be

After calculating the various game history information, the CPU 308 stores the calculated various game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the values of the counters of the register 304 to "0". In addition, hereinafter, various types of game history information calculated each time 500 game balls are shot to the game board 30 are collectively referred to as a "short-term game history information group".

The calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory for storing the game history information calculated by the CPU 308, and in this embodiment, it is composed of a non-volatile memory capable of retaining the memory even if the power supply is cut off. It is The calculation result storage memory 309 also stores information about the order in which the short-term gaming history information group was written. The short-term game history information group thus written is stored in an area in which the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in/first-out method), and the most recent short-term game history information group is always stored. be in a state where

In this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term game history information groups calculated each time 500 game balls are shot onto the game board 30. is doing. For example, if game balls are continuously shot for 10 hours in a day, 60,000 game balls will be shot in a day. It will be stored in the result storage memory 309 . Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 can store short-term game history information groups for the most recent ten days.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 , it transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the game history information to the game history management chip 300 . Upon receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320 , the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 transmits the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 . As a result, the inspection machine 320 acquires the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 and causes the display unit 328 to display the acquired game history information.

Thus, in this embodiment, each time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500, that is, each time 500 game balls are shot onto the game board 30, the game such as the role product ratio History information is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 . Then, the calculated game history information is displayed on the display section 328 of the inspection machine 320 .

A3. Details of various processes executed in gaming machines:
Next, each process performed by MPU62 (this embodiment CPU62x) is demonstrated. The processing of the MPU 62 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the main process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. In step S10101, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, it executes initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a process of transmitting calculation data to the game history management chip 300 is executed in the initial setting process. Specifically, the calculation data (the number of winning balls data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 . As will be described later, the game history management chip 300 that has received the calculation data stores the prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively. is sent to the main side MPU 62. After executing step S10101, the process proceeds to step S10102.

In step S10102, it is determined whether or not a setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has been received (S10102: YES), the flow advances to step S10103 to set interrupt permission to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10102 that the setting completion command has not been received (S10102: NO), the process of step S10102 is executed again. In other words, the process does not proceed to step S10103 until the setting completion command is received, and interrupt permission setting for permitting generation of timer interrupt processing is not performed.

After executing step S10103, the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 is performed. In other words, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as will be described later, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S10104 to S10107 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S10104, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S10105, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S10106, variation counter update processing for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S10107, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S10107, the process returns to step S10104, and the processes of steps S10104 to S10107 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment) will be described.

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process is started at a specific cycle (4 msec cycle in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, random number update process for lottery is executed in step S10201. In the lottery random number update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information , overwrites the read source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, the process proceeds to step S10202.

In step S10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and the flow advances to step S10203 to update the variation type counter CS in the variation type counter update process. After that, the process proceeds to step S10204.

In step S10204, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when information is set to switch the large winning opening 36a to the open state, output of a drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information to switch the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. When set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step S10205.

In step S10205, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the incoming ball signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S10206.

In step S10206, signals received from each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. The processing contents of the ball-entering detection processing will be described in detail later. After that, the process proceeds to step S10207.

In step S 10207 , the ball entry detection information is output to the bit of the buffer 302 of the game history management chip 300 . Specifically, the bit corresponding to the ball entrance determined to have entered the game ball in the ball entry detection process of step S10206 is turned ON (“1”), and the bit corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. is turned ON (“1”). After that, the process proceeds to step S10208.

In step S10208, a timer update process is executed for collectively updating numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. Then, it progresses to step S10209 and performs the output setting process of a prize ball command. After that, the process proceeds to step S10210.

In step S10210, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the ball entry process for the starting port, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. While acquiring the value, the acquired counter value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM64. After executing step S10210, the process proceeds to step S10211.

In step S10211, ball-entering processing for the through-gate accompanying entry (passage) of the game ball to the through-gate 35 is executed. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is stored in the electronic device of the RAM 64. Store in reservation area 64d. After executing step S10211, the process proceeds to step S10212.

In step S10212, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. After executing step S10212, the process proceeds to step S10213.

In step S10213, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. In the game state transition processing, processing is executed to shift the game state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

In step S10214, an electric role support process for controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric role product 34a (electric role product opening lottery), and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric role product 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S10214, the process proceeds to step S10215.

In step S10215, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, a process for shooting a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S10215, the process proceeds to step S10216.

In step S10216, external information setting processing is executed so as to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the processing results of the various processing executed in this timer interrupt processing. After executing step S10216, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S10206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the ball entry detection process, a process of confirming the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is executed. Here, before describing the entering ball detection process, the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main side MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle 8 types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing "0" or "1" information according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7.

In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 62b, in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 62b depends on the driver IC. Switched through switching control. In the ball-entering detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 62b is set to each of the ball-entering detection sensors 44a to 44h.

In this setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the 1st bit D1 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the first start opening detection sensor 44b. Corresponding information is stored, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second start hole detection sensor 44c, and the third bit D3 is stored to the ball entry signal from the first winning hole detection sensor 44d. Corresponding information is stored, the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second winning hole detection sensor 44e, and the fifth bit D5 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the third winning hole detection sensor 44f. Corresponding information is stored, the sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. Stored.

In this case, each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs a HI level signal indicating non-detection as a ball entry signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and the passage of the game ball is output. is detected, a LOW level signal indicating that the ball is being detected is output as an incoming ball signal. However, the main control board 151 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the state of the signal is inverted before each detection signal is input to the input port 62b. When the input port 62b receives a LOW level signal through the inverting circuit, it stores "0" information (data 0 or no information) in the corresponding bit, and receives a HI level signal through the inverting circuit. If the data is present, "1" information (data 1 or presence information) is stored in the corresponding bit.

In other words, in a situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, "0" information corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In the state where detection is in progress, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is in progress is stored in the corresponding bit.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs a LOW level signal as a ball entry signal while not detecting the passage of a game ball, and outputs a HIGH level signal as an entry ball signal while the passage of a game ball is detected. It may be configured to output a level signal. In this case, the inverting circuit should be considered defective.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ball-entering detection process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. FIG. 15(a) is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62. FIG. FIG. 15(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the ball entry determination area used in the ball entry detection process. In the ball entry detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process of shifting to the one-ball determination area WA1 is executed. The first ball entry determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. It is a data capacity that can be used. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence. The information of D0 is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first ball entry determination area WA1.

In the subsequent step S10302, a wait process for ball entry detection is executed. In the wait process, the main MPU 62 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In the pachinko machine 10, the wait time is set to 10 μsec, but it does not impede the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process, and furthermore, the function and effect to be described later due to the setting of the wait process can be fully exhibited. Although the specific wait time is arbitrary as long as it is possible, it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

Incidentally, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the processing of one step. Therefore, even if the processing of step S10302 is not set, a forced wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between steps S10301 and S10303. In this regard, in step S10302, in addition to the minimum time required to execute the process, an additional wait time is set between the process of step S10301 and the process of step S10303.

In the following step S10303, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is transferred to the second entering ball determination area WA2 in the register of the main side MPU 62. FIG. Incidentally, since the information in the input port 62b is updated at intervals shorter than the time from the completion of step S10301 to the start of step S10303, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 are updated in step S10303. The information migrated from may be different than in step S10301.

Like the first ball entry determination area WA1, the second ball entry determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15(b-2). It has a data capacity that can store all of the stored information. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the second entering ball determination area WA2 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence. The relationship between the bit and the bit of the storage destination is the same as in the case of the first ball entry determination area WA1.

After that, in step S10304, after executing the ball entry determination process, the main ball entry detection process is terminated. The entering ball determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the ball entry determination process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. In the entering ball determination process, first, in step S10401, 8 is set in the entering ball determination counter provided in the main RAM 64 . In the following step S10402, each bit information corresponding to the current numerical value information of the entering ball determination counter in the first entering ball determination area WA1 and the second entering ball determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit at the input port 62b.

In subsequent step S10403, the AND processing of each information grasped in step S10402 is executed, and the result of the AND processing is stored in a register. Of these, the result of the AND processing is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side on which the information on the result of the AND processing was stored in the incoming ball detection processing in the processing of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 15(b-3) and 15(b-4). The data capacity is such that it is possible to store all information of the result of AND processing between each bit and each bit of the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, the order of the bits in the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 that are subject to AND processing, and the order of the bits in the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4. is uniquely defined.

After that, in step S10405, in the side of the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 in which the information of the result of the AND process was stored in the entering ball determination process in the previous timer interrupt process, Then, the information of the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is read. Then, in step S10406, an inversion process is executed to invert the read information between "0" and "1".

After that, in step S10407, the AND processing of the information of the AND processing result in step S10403 and the information of the reversing processing result in step S10406 is executed. It is determined whether or not it is "1" corresponding to . If it is determined in step S10408 that the AND processing result is "1", the process proceeds to step S10409 and subsequent steps.

In step S10409, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port . If it corresponds to either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, in step S10410, the starting port entrance flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", and step S10411 , 1 is added to the numerical information of the 3 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 64 .

The starting port entry ball flag specifies the entry of the game ball to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 by the main side MPU 62, and the game ball to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 It is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 62 that it is a process corresponding to the entry of the ball and is in a state where the process other than the execution of the winning ball should be executed. Incidentally, since the ball detection sensors 44b and 44c are provided for the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34, respectively, the ball entering the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 may be grasped at the same time within the range of one timer interrupt process. Therefore, in order to correspond to this, the starting ball entry flags are provided corresponding to the number of the starting ports 33 and 34, specifically, two flags are provided. Also, the 3 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the main side MPU 62 should output a 3 prize ball command instructing execution of 3 prize balls.

If a negative determination is made in step S10409, it is determined in step S10412 whether or not the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the variable winning device . When the variable winning device 36 is supported, at step S10413, "1" is set to the big winning opening ball flag provided in the main side RAM64, and at step S10414, the main side RAM64 is provided. 1 is added to the numerical information of the 15 prize ball counter.

The main MPU 62 specifies the entry of a game ball into the variable winning device 36, and the big winning opening ball flag is processing corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 36, This flag is used by the main MPU 62 to specify that a process other than execution should be executed. Also, the 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the main side MPU 62 should output the 15 prize ball command instructing execution of 15 prize balls.

If a negative determination is made in step S10412, it is determined in step S10415 whether or not the current numerical information of the ball entry determination counter is information indicating the bit corresponding to the through gate 35. FIG. If it corresponds to the through gate 35, the through passage flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S10416.

The through passage flag specifies that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 in the main side MPU 62, and indicates that the main side MPU 62 is in a state in which processing corresponding to the game ball entering the through gate 35 should be executed. It is a flag for specifying in MPU62.

When a negative determination is made in step S10415, in step S10417, the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter corresponds to any of the first winning opening 32a, second winning opening 32b and third winning opening 32c. It is determined whether or not the information indicates a bit. If it corresponds to any one of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b and the third winning opening 32c, in step S10418, the general winning opening ball flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". ” is set, and in step S10419, 1 is added to the numerical value information of the 3 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 64 .

The general winning hole entry ball flag is a flag for specifying the entry of the game ball to the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b or the third winning hole 32c in the main side MPU62. Incidentally, the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, and the third winning hole 32c are provided with the ball detection sensors 44d, 44e, and 44f, respectively. A ball entering the winning hole 32b and a ball entering the third winning hole may be grasped at the same time within the range of one process of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, in order to correspond to this, the general winning opening ball flags are provided corresponding to the number of the general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c, specifically, three. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the main MPU 62 should output the 3 prize ball command instructing the execution of 10 prize balls.

If a negative determination is made in step S10417, it means that the current entry corresponds to the discharge passage, so in step SAD20, the discharge passage passage flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". to set. The discharge passage passage flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 62 that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage.

If a negative determination is made in step S10408, or after executing any one of steps S10411, S10414, S10416, S10419, and S10420, the process proceeds to step S10421. In step S10421, the entry determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10422, it is determined whether or not the entry determination counter is "0".

If the entry determination counter is not "0", the processing of steps S10402 to S10420 is executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the entry determination counter updated in step S10421. When the processes of steps S10402 to S10420 are executed for the numerical information set in step S10401, an affirmative determination is made in step S10422, and this entering ball determination process ends.

Next, by executing the ball-entering detection process (FIG. 15), the general winning port 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the discharge passage The manner in which the presence or absence of a hit ball is detected will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the presence/absence of a hit ball is detected. First, with reference to FIG. 17(A), the timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter also referred to as "entering ball information") of the entering ball detecting sensors 44a to 44h will be described. FIG. 17A is a timing chart for explaining the timing of monitoring each piece of incoming ball information.

As shown in FIG. 17(A), in a configuration in which timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) is activated at T1 (specifically, 4 msec) intervals, processing for monitoring incoming ball information is performed at each processing time of timer interrupt processing. This is performed twice (steps S10301 and S10303). The processing for monitoring each set of entering ball information is executed so that the timing is delayed. is executed when the time has passed.

In this case, the timing at which the ball-entering detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the processes whose processing time is likely to fluctuate, such as the game turn control process and the electric support process. The processing that is executed prior to the detection processing is processing whose processing time is relatively less likely to fluctuate. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process of each process, the period until the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side is started is the same, substantially the same, or the same as T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of entering-ball information included in each processing cycle of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the preceding-side entering-ball information is periodically executed.

Further, among the processes for monitoring each set of ball entry information, between the process for monitoring the front side entry information (step S10301) and the process for monitoring the rear side entry information (step S10303), A wait process for ball-entering detection (step S10302) is executed, but this wait process does not execute any process and only waits until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of ball entry information included in each processing cycle of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the rear ball entry information is periodically executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(B), the contents of the calculation executed when the entering ball determination is performed will be described. FIG. 17(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the calculation executed when the entering ball determination is performed. Although various operations are actually performed in 1-bit units, in the following explanation, the contents of the operations will be explained in 1-byte units. However, the configuration may be such that the operation is actually performed in 1-byte units as described below.

In the case of FIG. 17(B), first, in the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side in the n-th timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 17(B1), "00100000" ” is set. In this case, the ball entry information of the third winning hole detection sensor 44f among the respective ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is information indicating that a game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as information that a game ball has been entered). The entering ball information of other sensors is information indicating that the game ball is not detected (hereinafter also referred to as no entering ball information).

Further, in the process of monitoring the trailing ball entry information in the n-th timer interrupt process, "10100000" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17(B2). In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge path detection sensor 44h and the third prize winning opening detection sensor 44f each provide ball entry information, and the other sensors provide ball entry information. .

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "00100000" as shown in FIG. Information is set in the first post-computation area WA3 as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt process of the n-th process. If the monitoring result of the entering ball information is set in the post-first calculation area WA3 in the n-1th timer interrupt process, the monitoring result of the entering ball information in the n-th timer interrupt process is set to the second calculation. It is set in the rear area WA4. Also, the ball entry determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the n-1th ball entry information and the monitoring result of the nth ball entry information, but the details of the calculation of this process are omitted here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17(B4), "10100110" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1 in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third prize winning opening detection sensor 44f, the second start opening detection sensor 44c, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b each have entry information. It is set and other sensors have no ball entry information.

In addition, in the process of monitoring the trailing ball entry information in the n+1th timer interrupt process, "10100010" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 17(B5). In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third prize winning opening detection sensor 44f, and the first starting opening detection sensor 44b each have the ball entry information, and the other sensors It is information that there is no entry.

When the information of the first ball entry determination area WA1 and the second ball entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is "10100010" as shown in FIG. Information is set in the second post-calculation area WA4 as the monitoring result of the incoming ball information in the timer interrupt processing of the (n+1)th processing.

After that, in the entering ball determination process (FIG. 16) in the n+1th timer interrupt process, the result of monitoring the entering ball information in the nth timer interrupt process is first read from the first post-computation area WA3 and read out. Inversion processing is performed on the information of the monitoring result obtained. Then, as shown in FIG. 17B7, it becomes "11011111". Then, the result of the reversal processing is ANDed with the monitoring result of the entering ball information in the (n+1)th timer interrupt processing. This results in "10000010" as shown in FIG. 17(B8). In this case, in the ball entry determination process, it is determined that the entry of the game ball is detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, and that the entry of the game ball is detected by the first start hole detection sensor 44b. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 17(B4), the second starting hole detection sensor 44c has entered ball presence information in the process of monitoring the leading ball entering information in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. is caused by electrical noise. In this case, even if it is confirmed that there is a change from the no-ball entry information to the ball-entry information, it is not immediately determined that the ball has been entered. It is the configuration that identifies the occurrence. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17 (B5), in the process of monitoring the ball entering information on the rear side in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process, the second starting hole detection sensor 44c is the no ball entering information, and the electrical The occurrence of noise is not treated as the entry of a game ball.

In addition, in the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, input is performed in each of the process of monitoring one set of entering ball information in the nth timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring one set of entering ball information in the (n+1)th timer interrupt process. Although it is the ball presence information, this indicates a state in which a game ball whose entry has already been grasped is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of a ball entry is specified on the condition that the result of monitoring the ball entry information in the n-th timer interrupt process is "0", one game ball is counted as a plurality of ball entries. Do not treat it as an incoming ball.

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the detection results of the respective ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are monitored, and when an entry corresponding to the application of the gaming ball occurs. 3, addition processing to the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter and 15 prize ball counter is executed according to the ball entry position. If any of these counters is "1" or more, the award command is set in the award command output setting process (step S10209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). The awarded ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In this case, the output setting of the prize command is performed only once in one processing of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is "2" or more, the 15 prize ball command is transmitted only once in one process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined plurality of (for example, two or three) prize ball commands are transmitted in one processing.

It is also conceivable that each of the 3 prize ball counter, the 10 prize ball counter, and the 15 prize ball counter is "1" or more. have priority. That is, the output of the 15 ball command has priority over the output of the 10 ball command and the output of the 3 ball command, and the output of the 10 ball command is prioritized over the output of the 3 ball command. .

When the 15 prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 15 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 15 prize ball counter. Also, when the 10 prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 10 prize ball command is set as an output target, the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by one. Further, when the 3 prize ball counter is "1" or more and the 3 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 3 prize ball counter.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the following main processing when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300. As shown in FIG.

In step S10501, it is determined whether or not calculation data including the number of winning balls data and calculation execution conditions has been received. If it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has been received (S10501: YES), the process proceeds to step S10502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that the calculation data has not been received (S10501: NO), the process of step S10501 is executed again. That is, the infinite loop continues without proceeding to the next step S10502 until the calculation data is received.

In step S10502, the received number-of-balls data is stored in memory 306 for storing number-of-balls-winning data. After that, the process advances to step S10503 to store the received calculation execution condition in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10504.

In step S10504, a setting completion command indicating that the storage of the number of prize balls data in the number of prize balls data storage memory 306 is completed and the storage of the calculation execution condition to the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is completed. is transmitted to the main side CPU 62x. After that, the process proceeds to step S10505.

In step S10505, it is determined whether or not the bit of the buffer 302 contains the ball entry information received from the main side CPU 62x ("1" is stored in the bit). If it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 contains the incoming ball information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: YES), the process advances to step S10506 to set the counter of the register corresponding to the bit of the buffer 302 to 1. to add. Specifically, for example, when the bit corresponding to the first starting hole entry information in the buffer 302 is "1" and the bit corresponding to the normal mode is "1", the big win in the register 304 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the entrance _NS , and 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the normal mode. After that, the process proceeds to step S10507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10505 that the bit of the buffer 302 does not contain the ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10507 without executing step S10506.

In step S10507, it is determined whether or not the computation execution condition stored in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is established. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharge passage passage number _NOUT stored in the register 304 is 500, that is, whether or not the number of game balls shot to the game board 30 has reached 500. judge. If it is determined in step S10507 that the computation execution condition stored in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied (S10507: YES), the process proceeds to step S10508.

In step S10508, based on the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304, various game history information Arithmetic processing for calculating is executed. After that, the process advances to step S10509 to store the calculated various game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 . After that, the process proceeds to step S10510, and the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304 is cleared to zero. After that, the process proceeds to step S10511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10507 that the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage memory 307 is not established (S10507: NO), step S10511 is skipped without executing steps S10508 to S10510. proceed to

In step S10511, it is determined whether or not a transmission request command for game history information has been received from the inspection machine 320. If it is determined that a transmission request command has been received (S10511: YES), the process proceeds to step S10512. , the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . The inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information. After executing step S10512, the process returns to step S10505 to repeat the processes from step S10505 onward. On the other hand, in step S10511, if it is determined that the game history information transmission request command has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10511: NO), the process returns to step S10505 without executing the processing of step S10512, and step The processing after S10505 is repeated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 can calculate the game history information, which is information correlated with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game. If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled by checking the game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 includes the calculation result storage memory 309 that stores the calculated game history information in a non-volatile manner. Since the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the game history information differs for each pachinko machine 10 and is unique to the pachinko machine 10 . That is, the game history information is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 . According to this embodiment, the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, is stored in the calculation result memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the main body of the pachinko machine 10. do. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the pachinko machine 10 itself. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, information about the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be obtained from the hall computer installed in the game hall. However, since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed from time to time, there are cases where it is placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. Can not do it. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, is stored in the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the main body of the pachinko machine 10. Since the information is stored, even when the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to the hall computer, the game history information can be obtained from the main body of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment always maintains a one-to-one relationship between the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (the state of being installed in a game hall or the state of circulation). , and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are both mounted on the main MPU 62, and are configured to operate with the same power source. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by the hall computer, a problem occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer. game history information can be calculated as long as power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, even if there is a problem in the processing of the hall computer. If the main side CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by different power supplies, and if there is a problem with the power supply of the game history management chip 300, the pachinko machine 10 is still playing games. Regardless, there arises a problem that the game history information cannot be calculated. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, since the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by the same power source, the game history information can be calculated whenever the game is executable. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game history information.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the calculation result memory 309 is stored inside the circuit board box where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the memory 309 for storing calculation results is physically touched, a trace of opening the board box remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is altered through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, the fact that the information has been altered can be grasped from the traces on the board box. It becomes possible to Therefore, unauthorized modification of the game history information can be prevented. Since the pachinko machine 10 is distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made in the process of distribution, but the operation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box where the traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the game history information by someone can be suppressed. In addition, since the game history information is information obtained based on the games that have been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the game history information that reflects the game-related characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the number of prize balls data stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main ROM 63. can be calculated. Furthermore, even if different prize ball number data is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10, the game history management chip 300 can be used to play a correct game using the prize ball number data set for each type of pachinko machine 10. Historical information can be calculated. If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled by confirming the correct game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 62x transmits a signal including the number of prize balls data stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300, thereby enabling game history management. A configuration in which the chip 300 cannot access the number-of-balls data storage area of the main-side ROM 63, and a storage position of the number-of-balls data stored in the number-of-balls data storage area of the main-side ROM 63 by the game history management chip 300. Even in a configuration where (memory address) cannot be grasped, the game history management chip 300 can acquire the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63 .

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the main processing of the main CPU 62x, the interruption of the timer interruption processing is not permitted until the setting completion command is received, and the game ball launch control processing included in the timer interruption processing is not executed. It is configured. That is, since the game ball is not shot until the memory 306 for storing the number of prize balls data is completely stored, the game ball is not included in the calculation target of the game history information by the game history management chip 300. - 特許庁can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the game history information for each period until 500 game balls are detected by the discharge path detection sensor 44h is calculated and stored, each pachinko machine 10 detects 500 game balls. Even if there is variation in the time until is detected, it is possible to calculate and store game history information that does not affect the variation in time. That is, even if there is a height difference in the frequency with which game balls are shot, it is possible to calculate and store highly accurate game history information that is not easily affected by the difference. In addition, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which the ball-entering information to each ball-entering hole is stored as it is.

If the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimal conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 as the operation execution conditions. According to this embodiment, since the game history management chip 300 acquires the operation execution conditions stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, the operation set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 An operation for calculating game history information can be executed when an execution condition is satisfied.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304 Since the (counter value) is erased, it becomes possible to store the information on the number of game balls entered in the register 304 again. Therefore, the storage capacity required for register 304 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 , the inspection machine 320 can display the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 . Then, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the game history information displayed on the inspection machine 320. - 特許庁

A4. Other aspects of the first embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it was set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reached 500 pieces. A configuration in which a time interval for executing the calculation is set as an execution condition may be employed. For example, one hour is set as the time interval for executing calculations, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to calculate the game history information each time one hour elapses. An inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the detailed game history information calculated every hour, and can appropriately judge whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled. Become. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Note that if the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the game characteristics are also different, so the optimal conditions (time intervals) for executing calculations for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 as the operation execution conditions. Therefore, in this aspect 1 as well, the game history management chip 300 acquires the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, so that it is possible to set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. An operation can be executed when the operation execution condition is satisfied.

Further, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 measures the elapsed time after the calculation is executed, determines whether or not the player is playing a game, and determines that the game is not being played. The measurement of the elapsed time may be interrupted during the period of time. Specifically, for example, when there is no winning ball information in the bit of the buffer 302 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 minutes), it is determined that the game is not being played, and measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the game has been restarted and measurement of the elapsed time is restarted when the winning ball information is confirmed in the bit 302 . According to this configuration, the game history information can be calculated only for the period in which the game is actually played.

The elapsed time may be measured by using a timer counter, or by providing an RTC (Real-Time Clock) and using date and time information of the RTC. Further, the configuration may be such that the game history information is calculated at each predetermined time.

<Aspect 2>
In the first embodiment, as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it was set that the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reached 500 pieces. As an execution condition, the configuration may be such that the occurrence of power shutdown is set. Specifically, when the power failure monitoring circuit 86 detects that the power has been cut off, it outputs a signal indicating that the power has been cut off to the game history management chip 300 . The CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 that has received the signal determines that the power has been cut off, and calculates the game history information. In this configuration, the register 304 is composed of a volatile memory, and the entered ball number information is erased. According to such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the game history information based on the number of game balls detected during the period from when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is started to when the power is cut off. can. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start of the game hall to the end of the business, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp whether or not there has been a change in the characteristics of the game history information over the business days of the game hall. It is possible to appropriately judge whether or not As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, if a capacitor 87 is provided to supply power to the game history management chip 300 even after the power supply is interrupted, a memory 309 for calculating the game history information by the CPU 308 and storing the calculation result of the game history information. can be reliably completed.

<Aspect 3>
In the above-described first embodiment, the main side CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and may be configured to display the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 on the symbol display device 41. . According to this configuration, since the game history information is displayed on the pattern display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 uses a dedicated device (such as the inspection machine 320) to check the game history information. The game history information of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed without using it. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309 but cannot change data. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, or the like.

<Aspect 4>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x is configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and notifies that the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 does not satisfy a predetermined condition. An LED lamp for this purpose may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a predetermined portion of the main display section 45). For example, when a specific value included in the game history information (for example, character ratio, continuous character ratio, payout ratio (during normal mode)) is no longer within a predetermined range, the LED lamp may be configured to emit light. good. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine can easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range. By checking the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved. In particular, if the nails near the first starting port 33 and the general winning ports (first to third winning ports 32a to 32c) are tampered with, the aforementioned payout ratio (during the normal mode) will be the design of the pachinko machine. It will sometimes deviate from the assumed predetermined range (eg, 0.60 to 0.70). Therefore, by configuring the LED lamp to emit light when the payout ratio (during normal mode) is no longer included in a predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70), the first start port 33 and general winning It can be appropriately determined whether or not the nails near the openings (first to third winning openings 32a to 32c) have been tampered with.

Further, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp is determined according to the degree of divergence from a predetermined range of specific values (for example, character ratio, continuous character ratio, payout ratio (in normal mode)) included in the game history information. may be configured to determine the For example, when the character ratio is within a predetermined range (0.70 or less), the first LED lamp emits blue light, and when the character ratio is 0.71 to 0.80, the first LED lamp may emit purple light, and the first LED lamp may emit red light when the character ratio is 0.81 to 1.00. The second LED lamp emits blue light when the continuous character ratio is within a predetermined range (0.60 or less), and the second LED lamp when the continuous character ratio is 0.61 to 0.70. may emit purple light, and the second LED lamp may emit red light when the continuous character ratio is 0.71 to 1.00. Also, when the payout ratio (during normal mode) is within a predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), the third LED lamp emits blue light, and the payout ratio (during normal mode) is 0.71. ∼0.80, the third LED lamp emits purple light, and when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is between 0.81 and 1.00, the third LED lamp may emit red light. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp how much the specific value included in the game history information deviates from the predetermined range. It is preferable that the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309 but cannot change data. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, or the like.

<Aspect 5>
In the above-described first embodiment, the calculation data (the number of winning balls data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x). However, the game history management chip 300 is configured to be able to access the prize ball number data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 immediately after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A configuration in which the main ROM 63 is accessed to acquire calculation data (ball number data and calculation execution conditions), and the acquired calculation data is stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. may be According to such a configuration, the processing load on the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the above-described first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the role ratio. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. With such a configuration, the processing load on the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Details of mode 6 will be described below, centering on differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main controller 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and a storage execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, as in the first embodiment, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (ball number data) when the game balls enter each ball entering portion is stored. there is Also, as in the first embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The storage execution condition storage area stores a storage execution condition that is a condition for the game history management chip 300 to execute storage processing described later. In mode 6, it is stored as a storage execution condition that the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 500 pieces. The stored execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information from the CPU 62x into each ball entry hole, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls entered into each ball entry hole, and a main side ROM 63. A winning ball data storage memory 306 that stores the winning ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a storage execution condition storage memory 307a that stores the storage execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, and the overall control of the game history management chip 300 and a memory 309a for storing the number of entered balls that sequentially stores the number of game balls entered into each entrance stored in the register 304. FIG. The above-described storage processing is processing for storing the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304 in the entered ball number storage memory 309a.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10 . In mode 6, the winning ball number information stored in the winning ball number storage memory 309a and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. be done.

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A portion 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 6, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the number of entered balls information and the number of winning balls data to the game history management chip 300. Send to When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 receives the entered ball number information stored in the entered ball number storage memory 309a via the inspection terminal 65, and the winning ball number data storage memory 309a. The winning ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received ball number information and winning ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320 of mode 6 of the first embodiment.

The contents of the processing in the buffer 302 and the register 304 are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, so the description is omitted.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 . In this mode 6, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the winning ball number data stored in the main side ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the memory for storing number of prize balls data 306 are the same as the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the main ROM 63 .

The storage execution condition storage memory 307 a is a memory for storing the storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 . When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the stored execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a. Therefore, the contents of the stored execution condition stored in the stored execution condition storage memory 307 a are the same as the contents of the stored execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 .

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a has been established. Information on the number of game balls entering the ball opening is stored in the memory 309a for storing the number of entering balls, and the values of the counters of the register 304 are reset to "0". In this mode 6, every time the value of the discharge passage passing number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500, the CPU 308 determines the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the register 304. The information is stored in the number-of-entered-ball storage memory 309a. In addition, hereinafter, the information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance that is counted while 500 game balls are shot to the game board 30 is also referred to as "short-term entered ball number information group".

The number-of-entered-balls storage memory 309a is a memory for sequentially storing information (short-term number-of-entered-balls information group) related to the number of entered-balls stored in the register 304. In this embodiment, the information is stored even when the power supply is cut off. is configured by a non-volatile memory capable of holding The memory 309a for storing the number of entered balls also stores information on the order in which the group of information on the number of short-term entered balls is written. The short-term entry number information group is stored in an area in which the short-term entry number information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the memory 309a for storing the number of entered balls is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term entered-ball number information group (first-in/first-out method), and the latest short-term entered-ball number information group is always stored. It will be stored.

In this mode 6, the memory 309a for storing the number of game balls entering the game board 30 is a short-term entry that is information on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance counted while 500 game balls were shot to the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 ball number information groups. For example, if game balls are continuously shot for 10 hours in a day, 60,000 game balls will be shot in a day. It is stored in the number-of-entered-ball storage memory 309a. Therefore, the entering ball number storage memory 309a can store the short-term entering ball number information group for the last ten days.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 , it transmits a transmission request command to the game history management chip 300 . Upon receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320 , the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 transmits the short-term entered ball number information group and winning ball number data to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information such as a role ratio based on the short-term entered ball number information group and prize ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

Specifically, in this aspect 6, the inspection machine 320 can calculate one short-term game history information group for one short-term entered ball number information group, like the CPU 308 of the first embodiment. In addition, the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in each of a plurality of short-term entered ball number information groups is added, and long-term game history information is obtained using the added number of entered balls. (long-term game history information group) can be calculated. That is, the inspection machine 320 of aspect 6 not only stores the short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls were shot, but also, for example, 600,000 (approximately It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a long period of time when game balls were shot for 10 days.

In addition, in this aspect 6, the following configuration may be employed.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received short-term entered ball count information group on the display unit 328 . Also, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and display each received counter value on the display unit 328 .

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x The configuration may be such that the ball number data is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . According to such a configuration, the memory 306 for storing data on the number of winning balls can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a time interval for executing the storage process is set as the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 . For example, one hour is set as the time interval for executing the memory processing, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the memory processing each time one hour elapses.

Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which occurrence of power cutoff is detected as the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 . Specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 is configured to output to the game history management chip 300 a signal indicating that the power supply has been cut off when it detects the occurrence of the power cutoff. The CPU 308 of 300 may be configured to determine that a power cutoff has occurred and execute storage processing.

Further, in mode 6, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, but part or all of the calculation is executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300, and the calculation The game history information, which is the result of , may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

<Aspect 7>
In the above-described first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the role ratio. It may be configured to calculate the game history information. With such a configuration, the processing load on the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Details of mode 7 will be described below, centering on differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main controller 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

In mode 7, the main MPU 62 is provided with an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information to the game history management chip 300 . The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

A main-side ROM 63 of the main-side MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area. Note that, in mode 7, no calculation start condition storage area is provided.

In the prize ball number data storage area, as in the first embodiment, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (ball number data) when the game balls enter each ball entering portion is stored. there is Also, as in the first embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. be done. As a result, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 .

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires game ball entry information from the CPU 62x into each ball entrance, and a prize ball number data storage memory 306 that stores the prize ball number data acquired from the main side ROM 63. , a CPU 308 that controls the entire game history management chip 300, and a ball entry information storage memory 309b that sequentially stores the entry information of a game ball into each ball entrance stored in the buffer 302. .

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10 . In this mode 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information memory 309b and the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number data memory 306 are stored. The data is sent to inspection machine 320 .

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A portion 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 has been connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command requesting transmission of the winning ball information and the winning ball number data to the game history management chip 300. Send to When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection device 320, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, and the winning ball number data storage memory 309b. The winning ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information based on the received ball entry information and the winning ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the game history management chip 300 and inspection machine 320 of mode 7 of the first embodiment.

Since the content of the processing in the buffer 302 is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the description is omitted.

The ball entry information storage memory 309b is a memory for sequentially storing the ball entry information stored in the buffer 302 and the information regarding the game state when the game ball is entered. It is composed of a non-volatile memory that can hold memory even if the Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the ball entry information and the information about the game state are stored, information on the date and time when the game ball enters each ball entrance is added and stored. The memory 309b for storing information on entering a ball also stores information on the order in which information such as entering a ball is written. Information and the like are stored in an area in which the entry information and the like with the oldest written order are stored. That is, the memory 309b for storing ball entry information is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest entry information (first-in/first-out method), and the latest entry information and the like are always stored. state.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10 . In this mode 7, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main side ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the memory for storing number of prize balls data 306 are the same as the contents of the number of prize balls data stored in the main ROM 63 . Furthermore, in this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 , the prize number data stored in the prize number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 sends the game history management chip 300 a transmission request command requesting the transmission of the information on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls. Send to When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the testing machine 320, the CPU 308 receives the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, the information on the game status, and the date and time information. , and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received information, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

Specifically, the inspection machine 320 of aspect 7 calculates game history information (short-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls were shot. In addition to calculating, for example, game history information (long-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a long period of time when 600,000 game balls (for about 10 days) were shot It is possible to That is, it is possible to calculate the game history information for any period.

Furthermore, in this aspect 7, since the date and time information (date information and time information) is added to the ball entry information and the like, the inspection machine 320 can detect the range of date and time information added to the received ball entry information and the like. It is also possible to calculate the game history information by designating the range of dates and times for which the game history information is calculated. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can carry out a detailed inspection based on the game history information specifying the date and time range.

In addition, in this aspect 7, you may employ|adopt the following structures.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received ball entry information and the like on the display unit 328 . According to such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can also grasp the date and time when the game ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main side CPU 62x The configuration may be such that the ball number data is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 . According to such a configuration, the memory 306 for storing data on the number of winning balls can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

Further, in mode 7, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes the calculation for calculating the game history information, but part or all of the calculation is executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300, and the calculation The game history information, which is the result of , may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 .

<Aspect 8>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes, the main ROM 63 stores the calculation execution conditions or the memory execution conditions, and the game history management chip 300 acquires these conditions from the main ROM 63. , the game history management chip 300 may store these conditions in a non-volatile memory from the beginning. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which inappropriate calculation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main-side ROM 63, and the game history information or the number-of-balls information cannot be stored appropriately. can. For example, an extremely short period (for example, the number N _OUT =5 of passing through the discharge passage) is stored as the calculation execution condition or the storage execution condition, and the calculation result storage memory 309 or the entering ball number storage memory 309a It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which only game history information or ball-in number information for an extremely short period (for example, about one hour) is stored.

<Aspect 9>
In the above-described first embodiment and the above-described other aspects, the function of storing the number of game balls entering each ball entrance, the function of calculating game history information such as the role ratio, and the function of calculating the calculated game history information Although the game history management chip 300 has the function of storing, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have some of these functions. Alternatively, the game history management chip 300 may not be provided, and the main side CPU 62x (the main side MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have all of these functions. According to such a configuration, since it is not necessary to separately provide the game history management chip 300, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. However, according to the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 is provided, the processing load on the main side CPU 62x can be reduced.

<Aspect 10>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes, the game history management chip 300 has some or all of the functions provided by the functional units other than the game history management chip 300 (for example, the inspection machine 320 and the main CPU 62x). Alternatively, some or all of the functions provided by the game history management chip 300 may be provided by functional units other than the game history management chip 300 . For example, if the game history management chip 300 includes a part of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and manufacturing cost of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced. If the inspection machine 320 has a configuration in which a part thereof is provided, the processing load and manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be further reduced.

<Aspect 11>
In the above-described first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the role item ratio. good too. In the following, details of aspect 11 will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. This mode 11 is different from the above-described first embodiment (FIG. 5) in that the game history management chip 300 is not provided and that the main side RAM 64 is provided with a winning ball number storage area and a calculation result storage area. different.

The main side CPU 62x updates the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance stored in the entered ball number storage area of the main side RAM 64 based on the game ball entry information received from the input/output port 62a. do. Then, when the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is established, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 Calculation is executed based on the number of game balls entered in each ball entry section stored in the entry number storage area of , and the game history information is calculated, and the game history information is stored in the main side RAM 64 as a calculation result. store in the area. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the outline of the processing in the main MPU 62 of aspect 11 of the first embodiment. The main CPU 62x determines whether or not the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is satisfied. Information on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance stored in the cache is stored in the entry number storage area of the main side RAM 64.例文帳に追加In this mode 11, the main side CPU 62x, every time the value of the discharge passage passage number N _OUT stored in the cache of the main side CPU 62x reaches 500, updates information on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance. , is stored in the number-of-entered-ball storage area of the main side RAM 64 . As described above, the information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entrance counted while 500 game balls were shot to the game board 30 is also referred to as a "short-term entered ball number information group". .

The number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main-side RAM 64 is an area for sequentially storing information on the number of entered-balls (short-term number-of-entered-balls information group). Information on the order in which the short-term entry number information group is written is also stored in the entry number storage area of the main side RAM 64, and the main side CPU 62x does not have an empty area for writing the short-term entry entry number information group. In this case, the short-term entering number information group to be newly written is stored in the area in which the short-term entering number information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the entry number storage area of the main side RAM 64 is configured so that the oldest short-term entry number information group is overwritten in order (first-in/first-out method), and the most recent short-term entry number information is always stored. The group is stored.

In this mode 11, the number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main-side RAM 64 is information relating to the number of game balls entered into each ball-entering opening counted while 500 game balls were shot onto the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 pieces of information on the number of short-term entered balls. For example, if game balls are continuously shot for 10 hours in a day, 60,000 game balls will be shot in a day. It will be stored in the number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main side RAM 64 . Therefore, the number-of-entered-balls storage area of the main-side RAM 64 can store short-term number-of-entered-balls information groups for the most recent ten days.

Then, the main CPU 62x newly calculates one short-term game history information group for one newly stored short-term entered ball number information group each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. Furthermore, each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main side CPU 62x executes a game to each entrance stored in each of the plurality of short-term entrance-ball number information groups including the newly stored short-term entrance-ball number information group. The number of hit balls is added, and long-term game history information (long-term game history information group) is calculated using the added number of hit balls. That is, the main side CPU 62x of this aspect 11 not only stores the short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls were shot, but also, for example, 600000 (about It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance in a long period of time when game balls were shot for 10 days. Then, the calculated game history information is stored in the calculation result storage area of the main side RAM 64 .

The calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64 is composed of an area for sequentially storing short-term game history information groups and an area for storing long-term game history information groups. Information about the order in which the short-term gaming history information group was written is also stored in the area for sequentially storing the short-term gaming history information group. (a) stores the newly calculated short-term game history information group in the area in which the short-term game history information group with the oldest written order is stored. That is, the area for sequentially storing the short-term gaming history information group of the main side RAM 64 is configured so that the oldest short-term gaming history information group is overwritten in order (first-in first-out method), and the most recent short-term gaming history information group is always overwritten. The game history information group is stored. The area for storing the long-term game history information group is overwritten with the newly calculated long-term game history information group each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. That is, in the area for storing the long-term game history information group, the latest long-term game history information group calculated based on a plurality of short-term entered ball number information groups including the latest short-term entered ball number information group is stored. become.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, it transmits a transmission request command to the main CPU 62x. When receiving the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320 , the main CPU 62 x transmits the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection machine 320 . Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information.

Further, in this aspect 11, when the predetermined operation for displaying the game history information on the pattern display device 41 is executed, the game history information stored in the main side RAM 64 is transmitted via the input/output port 62x to the sound emission control. It is output to the device 90 and displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

Further, in this aspect 11, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power supply supplied from the capacitor 87 keeps the short-term entry number information group and the game history information stored in the main side RAM 64 counted. Configured to be retained for days.

According to such a configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes the processing for progressing the game such as the jackpot lottery processing and the processing for calculating and storing the game history information. Since there is no need to provide a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing history information, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, a short-term ball entry number information group, which is information on the number of game balls entered into each ball entry hole counted while 500 game balls were shot onto the game board 30, is stored in the main side RAM 64. 22, the configuration stores the game ball entry information in the same format (for example, the configuration stores the entry information in the format stored in the entry information storage memory 309b in FIG. 22), and In comparison, it is possible to calculate the most recent short-term game history information group and long-term game history information group while greatly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64 .

Note that the main CPU 62x is not limited to calculating both the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group as the game history information, and may be configured to calculate only one of them.

<Aspect 12>
FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 12 of the first embodiment. The difference from mode 11 (FIG. 23) described above is that the main MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64x which is a rewritable non-volatile memory capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. The point is that In this flash memory 64x, the number-of-entered-balls storage area for storing the short-term number-of-entered-balls information group in the above-described mode 11, and the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group in the above-described mode 11 are stored. and a calculation result storage area are provided.

The main side CPU 62x of mode 12 is configured to store the short-term entered ball count information group and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied.

According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with the configuration having the game history management chip 300 . Furthermore, even if the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time, the short-term entered ball count information group and the game history information are retained, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be kept in any state (for example, the pachinko machine can be operated for a long period of time). 10, the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information are always linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 are managed. , can be inspected.

In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the short-term entry number information group and the game history information in the main side RAM 64, the storage capacity of the main side RAM 64 can be suppressed, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. can do.

<Aspect 13>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the main controller 60 sends the game mode, which is a mode in which the game progress process, which is the process for progressing the game, and the game history information to the inspection machine 320. It is also possible to switch between the inspection mode, which is the output mode, and execute it. The game progress process is a process that is executed based on the detection of a game ball by the entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, and includes a jackpot lottery process, an electronic role opening lottery process, a prize ball payout process, and a main display section. 45, the process of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, and the like are included.

Then, in the inspection mode, even when the game ball passes through the area detected by the entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, the game progress processing may not be executed.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection mode is entered, the inspection mode flag for determining whether or not the inspection mode is set in the main controller 60 is turned ON. Then, main controller 60 determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON, and when it is determined that the inspection mode flag is ON, does not proceed to the processing flow for executing normal game progress processing. , proceed to the processing flow for inspection mode. As a result, even when the main controller 60 receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected from the entering ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, the main controller 60 performs processing based on the reception of the signal (for example, a random number Processing for acquiring the value of the counter C1, processing for paying out prize balls, processing for transmitting a command to the sound emission control device 90, etc.) are not executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute in the inspection mode a process that is not preferable to be executed in parallel with the game progress process, or a process that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress process. . Further, according to such a configuration, since the game progress processing is not executed in the inspection mode, when developing the program for the processing to be executed in the inspection mode, countermeasures for the case where the game progress processing is executed in parallel are taken. Since there is no need to consider it, the development efficiency of the program for the processing executed in the inspection mode can be greatly improved.

Further, the game history information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration for executing the process of outputting the game history information in parallel with the game progress process is adopted, while the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 based on the game history information, The contents of the game history information may change as the game progress process is executed, and it may become difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the configuration of aspect 13, even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the game history information is output in the inspection mode in which the game progress processing is not executed, so the game history information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the game history information from changing while the game is being played. As a result, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can smoothly perform the inspection.

The mode of outputting the game history information in the inspection mode is not limited to the mode of outputting the game history information to the inspection machine 320 and displaying it, and other modes may be used. For example, the game history information may be output to the symbol display device 41 and displayed.

Also, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to the game history information, and may be other information. For example, it may be other information based on the detection of game balls by the game ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, such as game ball entry information and entry ball number information.

<Aspect 14>
Among the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode, during execution of the game progress process in the game mode, the inspection mode is changed from the game mode to the inspection mode. When a predetermined operation (hereinafter also referred to as a "mode switching operation") for shifting to is executed by the inspector, at the timing when the game progress process being executed is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the game The mode may be changed to the inspection mode.

Specifically, for example, when the mode switching operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed during execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, each game progress processing being executed ( Jackpot lottery process, electric role open lottery process, award ball payout process, symbol variation display process on the main display unit 45, opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.) Allow the process to complete. Then, when the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the processing after the processing stage is not executed and the game enters a standby state. Then, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode at the timing when all of the game progress processes being executed have been completed up to a predetermined process stage.

According to such a configuration, the game mode is switched from the game mode to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed regardless of whether the game progressing process being executed has been completed up to the predetermined processing stage. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to the inspection mode, as compared with the configuration that shifts.

For example, provisionally, regardless of whether or not the game progress processing being executed has completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed. In this case, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process on the main display part 45 is executed as the game progress process in the game mode, the symbol on the main display part 45 is changed. It is difficult to control the pattern stop timing and the pattern fluctuation time, etc., because it is shifted to the inspection mode in the middle of the variable display. On the other hand, according to the configuration of aspect 14, for example, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing is being performed in the game mode, the symbol variation display processing is performed. At the timing when the processing is completed up to the processing stage where the pattern is stopped after the completion, the inspection mode is entered. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbols and the variation time of the symbols.

In addition, when shifting (returning) from the inspection mode to the game mode, it may be configured such that the game progress processing of the remaining processing stages scheduled to be executed before shifting to the inspection mode is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the expected game progress process ends in an incomplete state.

In addition, when the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, at the timing when all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode. may be According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when restarting the game progress processing.

Further, when the mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, the game execution processing is interrupted, and information enabling the restart of the interrupted game progress processing is stored in the main side RAM 64. It may be configured such that the game mode is changed to the inspection mode at the timing when the data is stored and the storage is completed. According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 quickly shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, so that many pachinko machines 10 can be inspected in a short period of time.

Further, the mode switching operation for shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, but may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing a mode switching button. Further, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is performed may be performed.

<Aspect 15>
Among the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, in the configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode, during the inspection mode, 10 minutes from the time of transition to the inspection mode If the automatic return condition that has passed is established, a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not performed However, it may be configured to shift from the inspection mode to the game mode.

According to such a configuration, when 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode, even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not executed, the inspection mode Since it is configured to shift to the game mode from , it is possible to reliably prevent the game mode from returning to the game mode without execution of a predetermined operation. For example, even if the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 forgets to execute a predetermined operation after inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 based on the game history information output in the inspection mode, the inspector enters the inspection mode. Since the game mode is restored after 10 minutes have passed since the shift, a situation occurs in which the pachinko machine 10 does not return to the game mode in which the game progress processing can be executed and the player cannot play the game with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

Note that the automatic return condition is not limited to the condition that 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode, and may be another aspect. For example, the condition may be that 5 minutes have passed since the inspection mode was entered, or that 10 minutes have passed since the inspection terminal 65 was removed from the inspection device 320 .

Further, the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, but may be another aspect. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing a mode switching button.

<Aspect 16>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, a RAM clear button for initializing the main side RAM 64 is provided in the main controller 60, and an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button (below, The information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized) when an "erase operation" is executed.

Furthermore, the main control device 60 may switch between the game mode and the test mode to execute. Then, in a state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, for example, in a state during the inspection mode or in a state where the power is turned off as it is after shifting to the inspection mode, while pressing the RAM clear button The information stored in the main RAM 64 may be configured not to be erased even when the erasing operation of pressing the power button is executed.

According to such a configuration, in the state after the shift to the inspection mode and before the shift to the game mode, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main side RAM 64 is executed. However, since the information stored in the main side RAM 64 is not erased, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, an erasing operation is mistakenly executed to shift to the game mode. Even if the information is stored in the wrong place, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

For example, an erasing operation for erasing information stored in the main RAM 64 is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the mode is shifted between the game mode and the inspection mode. In a configuration in which the operation for this is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, the intention of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button to switch from the inspection mode to the game mode is incorrect. There is a risk that the power button will be pressed while pressing the RAM clear button. However, according to the configuration of aspect 16, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, an erasing operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button by mistake is executed. Even if the information is accidentally erased, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode, the game progress processing being executed in the game mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress processing is returned to the inspection mode. In the case of adopting a configuration in which information for resuming later is stored in the main side RAM 64, the intention is to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button to return from the inspection mode to the game mode, but the RAM clear button is accidentally pressed. If the power button is pressed while pressing , the information for restarting the game progress processing is erased, and the game progress processing cannot be restarted after returning to the inspection mode. There is a risk that it will be disadvantageous to On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode, the power button is pushed while pushing the RAM clear button by mistake to shift to the game mode. Even if is pressed, the information stored in the main side RAM 64 can be prevented from being erroneously erased, so that the player is prevented from being disadvantaged. can be done.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which memorize|stores game history information in main side RAM64. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 because it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated memory for storing the game history information.

Further, when the erasing operation is executed, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power ON/OFF state, game mode or inspection mode), the game history stored in the main side RAM 64 Information may not be erased, and only information other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 (such as information stored for restarting the game progress process) may be erased (initialized). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress intentional erasure of game history information that deviates from the predetermined defined range.

Note that the erasing operation is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and may be performed in another manner. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the RAM clear button.

<Aspect 17>
Among the above-described first embodiment and other aspects, in a configuration in which the main controller 60 can switch between the game mode and the inspection mode, when the main controller 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode , a game stop command, which is a command indicating that the game progress processing is temporarily stopped by shifting to the inspection mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the game progress processing that was being executed is stopped in the inspection mode. It is good also as a structure which stops temporarily. Specifically, for example, when the mode is shifted to the inspection mode while the pattern variation display on the main display section 45 is being executed, the display on the main display section 45 is extinguished, and the pattern variation time on the main display section 45 is counted. to stop. Further, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, it transmits to the sound emission control device 90 a game restart command, which is a command indicating to shift to the game mode and restart the game progress processing. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

Then, when the game stop command is received, the sound emission control device 90 temporarily stops the effect being executed, and when the game restart command is received thereafter, the effect that has been temporarily stopped is configured to restart. According to such a configuration, even when the main control device 60 shifts between the game mode and the inspection mode, the game progress processing executed by the main control device 60 (for example, the pattern display on the main display section 45 is displayed). variable display process) and the effect controlled by the sound emission control device 90 (for example, the variable display process of the pattern in the pattern display device 41) can be synchronized, and the player feels uncomfortable after shifting to the game mode. can be suppressed.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured not to stop the effect being executed even when the game stop command is received. Specifically, for example, when the game stop command is received during the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41, the layer of the variable display of the symbols is continued while the control of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 is continued. A layer of another image (for example, a black image) is displayed on top of the . However, since the pattern display device 41 continues to control the variable display of the pattern, the variable display of the pattern continues under the layer of the black image. Then, when the pattern fluctuation time in the pattern display device 41 has passed, the pattern fluctuation display ends under the layer of the black image, but the pattern does not stop but sways slightly.

Then, when a game restart command is received from the main controller 60, the black image layer displayed above the pattern variable display layer is removed, and the pattern layer is displayed again. At this time, the main controller 60 shifts (returns) from the inspection mode to the game mode, and restarts the stopped game progress process (variation display of symbols on the main display section 45).

Then, the main controller 60 resumes the variable display of the symbols on the main display section 45, which had stopped counting the variable time, and when the remaining variable time elapses, that is, the variation of the symbols on the main display section 45 is resumed. When it is time to stop, a symbol stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the symbol stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 stops the symbol displayed in a slightly swaying manner on the symbol display device 41. stop completely.

According to such a configuration, when the main controller 60 is in the inspection mode, the display on the main display section 45 is turned off, and the display on the pattern display device 41 is a black image. Then, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 45, which had stopped counting the variable time, is resumed, and the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are displayed variably. It becomes a mode or a display mode that sways slightly. At the timing when the symbols on the main display portion 45 stop, the symbols on the symbol display device 41 also stop. That is, it is possible to synchronize the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 45 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 . In addition, even when a game stop command is received, the control of the effect being executed is not stopped, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble caused by temporarily stopping the control of the effect being executed. As a problem, for example, when the control of the production is resumed from the state where the control of the production is temporarily stopped, the timing of the plurality of productions is shifted when the plurality of productions are being executed. For example, there may be a discrepancy between the moving image displayed on the screen 41 and the sound output from the speaker 46 .

In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the main control device 60 does not transmit the symbol stop command to the sound emission control device 90 even when it is time to stop the variation of the symbols on the main display unit 45, the symbol The variable display of the pattern on the display device 41 continues in a slightly swaying mode, and the variable command transmitted from the main control device 60 after that, or the standby command transmitted when no hold information is stored. is received, the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are stopped.

<Aspect 18>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined time has come. Specifically, for example, at 11:10 pm, the game mode may be shifted to the inspection mode, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 . According to such a configuration, since the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at around 11:10 pm after the game hall closes, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected. A person can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 after the game hall is closed without taking time to shift each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

Further, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer. According to such a configuration, for example, all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall are shifted to the inspection mode all at once, and the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on each pattern display device 41. Therefore, an inspector of the pachinko machines 10 can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 without taking the trouble of shifting each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode. becomes.

<Aspect 19>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the configuration may be such that the game history information is always displayed on the symbol display device 41 . According to such a configuration, the player or the inspector can always check the game history information. It is possible to notice anomalies. As a result, it is possible to quickly ensure the soundness of the game.

<Aspect 20>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, a 7-segment display composed of seven light-emitting diodes is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and games stored in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the 7-segment display. It may be configured to display information related to history information. For example, when the main controller 60 shifts from the above-described game mode to the inspection mode, whether or not the accessory ratio and payout ratio (in normal mode) stored in the pachinko machine 10 are within a predetermined range. or may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

More specifically, for example, when the main controller 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, the 7-segment display displays "1" indicating that the character ratio is to be displayed, and then the character ratio is displayed. is within a predetermined range (specifically, when the character ratio is 0.700 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while the character ratio is not within a predetermined range, an error "E" may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After displaying the character ratio, "2" indicating that the continuous character ratio is to be displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and if the continuous character ratio is within a predetermined range (specifically is 0.600 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while if the continuous character ratio is not within the predetermined range, , an error "E" may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, "2" indicating that the payout ratio (in normal mode) is to be displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within a predetermined range. (Specifically, when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the range of 0.60 to 0.70), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, On the other hand, if the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is not within the predetermined range, an error "E" may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the accessory ratio. In addition, since the 7-segment display consumes less power, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the game history information can be inspected using only a small amount of power, such as the capacitors and batteries provided inside the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to

Also, the information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be always displayed on the 7-segment display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the role item ratio without switching from the game mode to the inspection mode. Also, even in the pachinko machine 10 that does not have an inspection mode, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the character ratio. Furthermore, if the 7-segment display is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, the 7-segment display does not come into the player's field of vision, so the player does not like the display of the 7-segment display. It can be suppressed that it becomes impossible to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, when an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine main body 12 supported by the hinge 15 is rotated forward, and the pachinko machine main body 12 is provided on the back side. Since it is only necessary to check the display of the 7-segment display, it is possible to easily and quickly check the game history information such as the character ratio. Instead of the 7-segment display, another display capable of displaying the game history information in a recognizable manner, such as a segment display composed of light-emitting diodes other than seven, may be employed.

<Aspect 21>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes described above, the configuration may be such that the sound emission control device 90 calculates the game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main controller 60 transmits a signal including the number of prize balls data stored in the number of prize balls data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the sound emission control device 90 in the initial setting process. , the sound emission control device 90 calculates game history information based on the obtained winning ball number data and the game ball entry information transmitted from the main control device 60, and calculates the calculated game history information may be configured to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

According to such a configuration, the voice emission control device 90 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63, and the voice emission control device 90 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63. Even if the storage position (memory address) of the stored prize ball number data cannot be grasped, the sound emission control device 90 can detect the prize balls stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63. It becomes possible to acquire number data, and to calculate game history information. Further, since the sound emission control device 90 calculates the game history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be greatly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The first embodiment and other aspects described above are applicable not only to the pachinko machine 10 capable of shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode, but also to a gaming machine capable of shifting from the game mode to another mode. . For example, it can be applied to a game machine having a game state display mode that can display the state of processing related to the game, such as the state of the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, and the content of the stored hold information. can.

<Aspect 23>
The first embodiment and other aspects described above are not limited to the pachinko machine 10, and can be applied to other types of gaming machines. For example, it can also be applied to reel-type gaming machines such as pachinko-type slot machines. Specifically, for example, the number of game medals obtained by winning during the bonus, the number of game medals obtained by the child role drawn during the normal section, and the number of game medals obtained during the advantageous section (AT, ART) other than the bonus For a configuration that calculates the ratio with the number of game medals to be obtained and displays the ratio on a liquid crystal display device, or a configuration that outputs the ratio to the inspection machine and displays the ratio on the display part of the inspection machine can be applied.

<Aspect 24>
In the above-described first embodiment and other modes, part or all of the functions realized by software (by CPU executing a program) may be realized by hardware. For example, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to include dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating game history information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information, and prevent the occurrence of fraud such as incorrect calculation of the game history information due to unauthorized tampering of the arithmetic program. can be suppressed. Note that the hardware may be configured by a digital circuit or may be configured by an analog circuit. If it is configured with an analog circuit, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing more than with a digital circuit.

<Aspect 25>
A configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 24 described above are appropriately replaced or combined may be employed. In addition, one or a plurality of configurations included in the above-described first embodiment and aspects 1 to 24 may be combined with one or a plurality of configurations included in embodiments other than the first embodiment. In addition, among the configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 24 described above, configurations that are not essential can be omitted as appropriate without departing from the spirit thereof.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or flashing at the time of a jackpot lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

27 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32 , a first starting port 33 , a second starting port 34 , a through gate 35 and a variable winning device 36 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, the entry of a game ball into the general winning hole 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 is also expressed as winning.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 until either condition is met. It is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

28A and 28B are explanatory diagrams showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 28(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and corresponds to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display portion 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, and when a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. A pattern for use is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numerals 1 to 8 as patterns for liquid crystal. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 28(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 28(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information obtained based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big win lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second In either one of the two-symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41, for each game round, After the pattern row is variably displayed as the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the obtained special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

As shown in FIG. 28(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. A reserved game round is a game round that has not been executed, and regarding special information acquired based on winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, variation for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It refers to a game round that has not started to be displayed. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the winning to the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, it is possible to display suspension displays corresponding to four suspension game rounds in the first suspension display area Ds1. Also, the number of pending games that can be held based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending game rounds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the liquid crystal normal map display area NA, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. A configuration may be adopted in which the surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays.

B2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entrances and through gates such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning driving unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , an opening/closing door driving portion 48b for opening and closing the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display portion 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for collation with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. A winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to when the jackpot lottery is held in the probability mode.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table. FIG. 31(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (for the low-probability mode), and FIG. 31(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, although not adopted in the hit/fail table in the present embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "minor win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening and closing execution mode, occurrence of game ball entry (winning) to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

In the present embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency winning mode described above is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 32(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 32(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 32(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot types based on the first starting port 33, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal A jackpot and an 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high-probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "14 to 27" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. , "28 to 33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port of FIG. 32(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "28 to 39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. corresponds to

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state is completed, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary product open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 33(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 33( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 33(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 33(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 values from 0 to 461 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

B3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 34 is a timing chart explaining an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode when winning a jackpot in a jackpot lottery. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode includes an opening period that is a period until the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is started, an opening/closing processing period that is a period during which the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b is executed, and an ending period which is a period after the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b is completed. In this embodiment, the first opening of the opening/closing door 36b is started immediately after the start of the opening/closing processing period.

First, the process when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 34(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 34, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10, when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode, the opening period is set to 10 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, regardless of the state of the support mode (game state) of the main control device 60, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right hitting notification effect for 3 seconds are executed. set to That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. The opening effect is a effect that suggests to the player that the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 will start due to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The right-handed informing effect is an effect that suggests to the player that "right-handed" is recommended. A player who recognizes the right-handed informing effect can understand that it is better to change from "left-handed" to "right-handed".

Here, "right-handed" means that a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a speed (shooting intensity, momentum) of a predetermined speed or more by setting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 to a predetermined amount or more. This is a method of distributing the game ball that has been moved to the area on the right side of the game area PA. On the other hand, "left-handed" means that a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a speed (shooting intensity, momentum) below a predetermined speed by setting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 to be less than a predetermined amount. This is a method of distributing the game balls that have been drawn to the area on the left side of the game area PA.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a variable winning device 36 is provided in the area on the right side of the game area PA. During the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 opens and closes, so that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 36a provided inside the variable winning device 36.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, it is recommended to hit "right", which is a way to circulate game balls in the area on the right side of the game area PA. Therefore, the right-handed informing effect is executed after the opening effect.

After the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect opening effect command. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, regardless of the state (game state) of the support mode of the main control device 60, the display control device 100 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and a right-hand hitting notification effect for 3 seconds. set to run. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect. In this way, the opening effect is executed by the cooperation of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 . Other effects such as a right-handed informing effect and a round effect, which will be described below, are similarly executed by the cooperation of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 .

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed information effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed information effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds. The round effect is a effect that suggests to the player that the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is being executed.

After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. The ending effect is a effect that suggests to the player that the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 has ended.

After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

Note that, in the present embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In this embodiment, a through gate 35, an electric accessory 34a, and a second starting port 34 are provided in the area on the right side of the game area PA. When the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role open lottery is won with high probability and the electric accessory 34a is opened, so the game ball is entered into the second start port 34.例文帳に追加becomes easier. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 34a is in the open state with a high probability, "right-handed hitting", which is a way of hitting the game ball in the area on the right side of the game area PA, is used. Recommended. In the present embodiment, since the hitting to the right notification effect is executed in the opening/closing execution mode, many players will recognize the hitting to the right notification effect and execute the "beat to the right". Then, the player who has executed the "right hit" in the opening/closing execution mode continues to "right hit" in the high frequency support mode even after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 34(B), a description will be given of the processing when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode. The main difference from the processing when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode described above is that the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 6.95 seconds and transmits the opening start command. In the case of (A) in FIG. 34, the execution is performed 6.95 seconds after the transmission of the opening command, and the sound emission control device 90 that receives the opening command is set to execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect ( In spite of executing the same processing as when winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode), the opening start command is received before the execution of the right-handed notification effect is started while the opening effect is being executed. It is a point that the round effect is executed without executing the hitting to the right notification effect. Specific processing will be described below.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 34, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10, when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the opening period is set to 7 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, regardless of the state of the support mode (game state) of the main control device 60, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right hitting notification effect for 3 seconds are executed. set to That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect opening effect command. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives an opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, regardless of the state (game state) of the support mode of the main control device 60, the display control device 100 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and a right-hand hitting notification effect for 3 seconds. set to run. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

As described above, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect. is configured to Similarly, the display control device 100 is configured to start control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed next to the opening effect when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends. ing. However, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 starts opening/closing when the opening period set to 6.95 seconds ends. Along with starting the processing period, an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . As a result, the sound emission control device 90 is executing the control corresponding to the opening effect and receives the opening start command from the main control device 60 before starting the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the opening start command ends the control corresponding to the opening effect being executed and sets to execute the round effect. That is, the start of control of the right-handed informing effect by the sound emission control device 90 is canceled although the right-handed informing effect was set to be executed.

After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

The display control device 100 is executing control corresponding to the opening effect and receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 before starting control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. The display control device 100 that has received the round effect command terminates the control corresponding to the opening effect being executed and sets to execute the round effect. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect. In other words, the start of control of the hitting-to-the-right notification effect by the display control device 100 is canceled despite the setting to execute the hitting-to-the-right notification effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the player wins a jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode in which the player is playing "left-handed", the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are executed. It is possible to suggest to the player that it has moved to the run mode and to recommend "right hitting", and to win a big win in the jackpot lottery during the high frequency support mode in which the player has already performed "right hitting". Since the right-handed informing effect is not executed when the player wins the prize, the game can be given a sense of speed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the open/close execution mode is not in effect and the high-frequency support mode is not in effect, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is not opened, and the electric accessory 34a is hardly opened. A “left-handed” shot that allows the ball to enter the starting hole 33 is recommended. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is recommended to change from "right-handed" to "left-handed" when the opening/closing execution mode ends and then the high-frequency support mode ends and transitions to the low-frequency support mode. Execute the left-handed notification effect.

Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example will be described.

FIG. 35 is a timing chart explaining an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example. The main difference from the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment is that when the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command, only the opening effect is set to be executed, and the sound emission control device 90 The main controller 60 transmits a right-handed notification command to the sound emission control device 90 when the right-handed notification effect is to be executed. A specific description will be given below.

First, the process when a big win is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 35(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 35, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example shifts to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode. , the length of the opening period is set to 10 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it is set to execute an opening effect for 7 seconds. After setting to execute the opening effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening effect command for setting to execute the opening effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When receiving the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 sets to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds, and starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

When a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 informs the sound emission control device 90 of hitting right at the timing when 7 seconds have passed since the opening period started. A right-handed notification command is transmitted to indicate that it is time to execute the effect. As will be described later, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, main controller 60 does not transmit the right-handed notification command.

When the sound emission control device 90 receives a right-handed informing command from the main control device 60 after completing the control corresponding to the opening performance for 7 seconds, it is set to execute the right-handed informing performance for 3 seconds. The sound emission control device 90, after setting to execute the hitting to the right notification effect, transmits to the display control device 100 a hitting to the right notification effect command for setting to execute the hitting to the right notification effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed information effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed information effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light.

When the display control device 100 receives the right hitting notification effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds, the display control device 100 sets to execute the right hitting notification effect for 3 seconds. , start the control corresponding to the right hitting notification effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 35(B), a description will be given of the processing when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode. The main differences from the processing when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode are that main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 7 seconds, and that main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 7 seconds. The point is that the strike notification command is not transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the transmission of the opening start command is executed seven seconds after the transmission of the opening command. Specific processing will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 35(B), when the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example shifts to the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, , the length of the opening period is set to 7 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60, it is set to execute an opening effect for 7 seconds. After setting to execute the opening effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening effect command for setting to execute the opening effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When receiving the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 sets to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds, and starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. . In addition, since the main controller 60 wins the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, unlike the case shown in FIG. Do not send the right stroke notification command. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 35(B), the hitting to the right notification effect is not executed.

The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after completing the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect, and performs control corresponding to the round effect. to start. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening/closing processing period ends when the number of openings of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 reaches a predetermined number, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect to the display control device 100 . After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this comparative example, as shown in FIG. Two commands, a command and an opening start command, may be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. When executing three effects, the main controller 60 needs to transmit three commands to the sound emission control device 90: an opening command, a right-handed notification command, and an opening start command. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the comparative example, the main controller 60 needs to transmit a right-handed notification command when executing a right-handed notification effect.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. Also, as shown in (B) of FIG. 34, even in the case of executing two effects of the opening effect and the round effect without executing the right-handed informing effect, the main controller 60 It suffices to send two commands, a command and an opening start command, to the sound emission control device 90 . That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the main controller 60 does not need to transmit the right-handed notification command whether the right-handed notification effect is executed or not. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the command transmission frequency of the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the processing load of the main controller 60 can be reduced. According to the present embodiment, the right-handed notification command shown in the comparative example of FIG. 35 is unnecessary, so the data capacity required for storing the right-handed notification command is reduced from the data ROM of the main ROM 63. can do. Further, the main control device 60 determines the state of the support mode (game state) when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and the process of determining whether or not to transmit the right-handed notification command based on the determination result is unnecessary. Therefore, the processing time of the main controller 60 can be shortened, and the program for the processing becomes unnecessary. Required capacity can be reduced.

B4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game round, the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the main MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S20101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves detection information (winning detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step S20102.

In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20103.

In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S20104.

In step S20104, the ball entry process for the starting opening accompanying the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the start opening in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the process advances to step S20105.

In step S20105, ball entry processing for the through gate accompanying the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the ball entry processing for the through gate in step S20105 will be described later. After executing step S20105, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Entering ball processing for the starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the start opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 36: S20104).

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the ball entry process for the starting opening. In step S20201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (starting ball). In step S20201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S20203.

In step S20203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20204.

In step S20204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205, whether or not the game ball entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and the prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. set command. After that, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, in step S20205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering process for this starting hole ends.

In step S20207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port . After that, the process proceeds to step S20208.

In step S20208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start suspension number RbN indicates the number of suspensions based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20209.

In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S20209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit (S20209: NO), that is, if the start suspension number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the ball-entering process for this starting opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S20209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S20211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20212.

In step S20212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 36) is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, step In S20210, it stores in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 36) The value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S20210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 36) is It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, ie, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process proceeds to step S20213.

In step S20213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the reservation information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the big winning lottery. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S20213, the process proceeds to step S20214.

In step S20214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Concretely, the decision result of previous decision processing which is executed on the basis of the information (pending information) of each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

The hold command indicates that the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has occurred, and the determination result by the previous determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the entry, to the hold This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 40 : step S20503) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to an increase in the number of pending items. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 displays the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change corresponding to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball-entering process for this starting opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S20213) of the prize winning process for the starting gate.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the pending information, determination results such as determination of whether the jackpot lottery is successful, determination of the type of jackpot, determination of presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. This is a process that is executed before the lottery is targeted.

In step S20301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read by entering the game ball into the starting hole in the ball entering process for the starting hole (FIG. 37). After that, the process advances to step S20302 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for the current ball entry is executed as a game round. Specifically, the judgment result of the first judgment process executed by the ball entry before the current ball entry is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether or not there is a probability variable jackpot that occurs before the jackpot lottery due to the ball entry this time. is determined, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current ball entry is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S20302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as a game round, (S20302: YES), the process proceeds to step S20303, and the success/failure table is stored. The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S20302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current ball entry is executed as a game round (S20302: NO), the process proceeds to step S20304, and the high probability mode. As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S20305, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S20305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S20305: YES), the process proceeds to step S20306, and is stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting port this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. After that, the flow advances to step S20307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the first start port distribution table , and if it is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 34, the distribution table for the second starting hole is referred to. After executing step S20307, the process proceeds to step S20308.

In step S20308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the variable probability jackpot. In step S20308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variable jackpot (S20308: YES), the process proceeds to step S20309, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S20308, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the variable probability jackpot (S20308: NO), the process proceeds to step S20310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S20305, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S20305: NO), the process proceeds to step S20311, and the entry to the starting port this time causes the storage area to Read out the stored value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S20312 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S20313, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S20313: YES), the process proceeds to step S20314, and reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20313 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S20313: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Ball entry processing for through gate>
Next, the ball entry processing for the through gate will be described. The ball entry process for the through gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 36: S20105).

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing ball entry processing for a through gate. In step S20401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35 or not. In step S20401, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S20401: YES), the process proceeds to step S20402, whether the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether or not Incidentally, the accessory reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S20401: NO), this through ball entering processing is terminated.

In step S20402, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role number SN (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20403, and 1 is added to the reserved role number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20404.

In step S20404, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 36) is stored in the first memory area among the empty memory areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the through ball entry processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S20402, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (S20402: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4, the through ball entry processing is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20501, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S20502.

In step S20502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step S20503.

In step S20503, the output data such as the start-up command set in step S20502 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S20503, the process advances to step S20504.

In step S20504, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S20505.

In step S20505, the ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20506. In step S20506, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S20506, the process proceeds to step S20507.

In step S20507, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20508.

In step S20508, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20509.

In step S20509, standby processing is executed to cause each sub-side control device to start a demonstration moving image when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. Thereafter, the process advances to step S20510.

In step S20510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S20503). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S20510, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S20510: NO), in steps S20511 and S20512, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S20511, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step S20512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing (S20510: YES), the process returns to step S20503, and each process from step S20503 to step S20508 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step S20503 to step S507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 40: S20506).

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S20601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the big win is won, and is turned OFF at the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S20601, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S20601: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game round is executed without executing any of the processes after step S20602. End the control process. That is, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20601 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S20601: NO), the process proceeds to step S20602.

In step S20602, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is terminated.

In step S20602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S20602: NO), the process proceeds to the game cycle start processing of steps S20603 to S20605. In step S20603, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S20603, when it is determined that the total number of reserved cards CRN is "0" (S20603: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S20603: NO), the process proceeds to step S20604.

In step S20604, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S20605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S20606.

In step S20606, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S20606, the process advances to step S20607.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20602 that the main display section 45 is performing variable display (S20602: YES), the process proceeds to step S20607.

In step S20607, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20607, it is determined whether or not the variable time information value stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in a variable time setting process (FIG. 44), which will be described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S20607 that the variable time has not elapsed (S20607: NO), the process advances to step S20608 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S20608, this game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S20607 that the variation time has elapsed (S20607: YES), the process advances to step S20609 to execute variation end processing. In the fluctuation end process, the stop symbol determined in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 43), which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 as the result of the current game round. After executing step S20609, the process advances to step S20610.

In step S20610, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The jackpot flag is a flag that is turned ON when a jackpot is won in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 43) to be described later. In step S20610, when it is determined that any of the jackpot flags are ON (S20610: YES), the process proceeds to step S20611, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S20610, when it is determined that none of the jackpot flags is ON (S20610: NO), this game round control process is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 41: S20604).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S20701, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be processed for data setting processing is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 269). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, it is stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 269) than the reservation information stored first among the reservation information chronologically stored in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 269) When the reservation information stored first among the reserved information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S20701, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S20701, when it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S20701: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S20702 to S20707 is executed. On the other hand, in step S20701, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S20701: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S20708 to S20713 is executed.

In step S20702, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the process proceeds to step S20703 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S20704. In step S20704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S20705.

In step S20705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S20705, the process advances to step S20706.

In step S20706, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S20707.

In step S20707, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is selected is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S20707 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 of the normal process (FIG. 40). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S20701, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S20701: NO), The process advances to step S20708.

In step S20708, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation quantity RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S20709. In step S20709, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process advances to step S20710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S20711.

In step S20711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S20711, the process proceeds to step S20712.

In step S20712, when the second pattern display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S20713.

In step S20713, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S20713 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 of the normal process (FIG. 40). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 41: S20605).

FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S20801, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variable jackpot. , and then turned off when a normal jackpot is won. In step S20801, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S20801:YES), it progresses to step S20802.

In step S20802, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 31(b). determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S20804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S20801: NO), the process proceeds to step S20803.

In step S20803, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. determine whether After that, the process proceeds to step S20804.

At step S20804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (big hit lottery) at step S20802 or step S20803 is a big hit. In step S20804, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S20804: YES), in steps S20805 to S20812, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S20805, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S20805, if it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S20805: NO), proceed to step S20806 and refer to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 271(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, in step S20805, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S20805: YES), the process proceeds to step S20807, and a distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 271(b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step S20806 or step S20807. The process advances to step S20808.

In step S20808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S20806 or step S20807 is a variable probability jackpot. In step S20808, when it is determined that the game result is a variable probability jackpot (S20808: YES), the process proceeds to step S20809.

In step S20809, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is changed in a state where any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20809, the process advances to step S20810.

In step S20810, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable flag is turned ON, and when it is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S20814.

In step S20808, if it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S20806 or step S20807 is not a probability variable jackpot (S20808: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, to step S20811 move on.

In step S20811, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game turn in which the normal jackpot is won, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot sorted in step S20806 or step S20807 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20811, the process proceeds to step S20812.

In step S20812, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S20806 or step S20807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 16R normal jackpot, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON in the case of the 8R normal jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S20814.

In step S20804, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S20802 or step S20803 is not jackpot winning (S20804: NO), the process proceeds to step S20813 to execute stop result setting processing for loss. The stop result setting process for the time of loss means that in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variation display is terminated in a state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S20813, the process proceeds to step S20814.

In step S20814, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S20814, the process proceeds to step S20815.

In step S20815, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display section flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S20815 that the second pattern display flag of RAM 64 is not ON (S20815: NO), the process proceeds to step S20816 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S20814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20815 that the second pattern display flag is ON (S20815: YES), the process proceeds to step S20817 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S20814. After executing step S20816 or step S20817, the process proceeds to step S20818.

In step S20818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S20816 to S20818 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal process (FIG. 40). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S20818, the process proceeds to step S20819.

In step S20819, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S20819, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 43: S20814).

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the variable time. In step S20901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained. After that, the process proceeds to step S20902.

In step S20902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S20902: YES), the process proceeds to step S20903.

In step S20903, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. After that, in step S20904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S20902, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S20902: NO), the process proceeds to step S20905 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this processing (S20905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won in the above step S20902, in the step S20905, reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S20905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S20906. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S20906, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, in step S20904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S20905, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (S20905: NO), the process proceeds to step S20907, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is acquired. After that, in step S20904, the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the non-reach variable time table is set such that the greater the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the variable time. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable time table for normal jackpot, the variable time table for loss reach, and the variable time table for complete loss may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 40: S20507).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the start of the ending period and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21001: NO), the process advances to step S21002 to determine whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing process period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing process period, and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing process period.

If it is determined in step S21002 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S21002: NO), the process advances to step S21003 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S21003, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S21003: NO), the process proceeds to step S21004, timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b is completed. It is determined whether or not. In step S21004, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S21004: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S21004, if it is determined that the time has come to end the variable display (S21004: YES), the process proceeds to step S21005, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether or not there is Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S21005: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21005, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21006, and the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S21007. If the high-probability mode flag is OFF in step S21006, the process proceeds directly to step S21007.

In step S21007, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S21007, the process advances to step S21008.

In step S21008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal processing (FIG. 40). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute an opening effect and a right-handed informing effect based on the reception of the opening command, and starts controlling various devices so that these effects are sequentially executed. After executing step S21008, the process advances to step S21009 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21003 that the opening period flag is ON (S21003: YES), the process proceeds to step S21010.

In step S21010, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S21010 that the opening period has ended (S21010: YES), the process advances to step S21011 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21012.

In step S21012, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S21012, the process proceeds to step S21013.

In step S21013, the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode is set. Specifically, while checking the jackpot type flag (16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64, the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in . The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened. After executing step 13913, the process advances to step S21014.

In step S21014, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the flow advances to step S21015 to set an opening start command. The set opening start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal processing (FIG. 40). This opening start command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. Based on the received opening start command, the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds, and controls various devices so that the set content of the round effect is executed. Start. After executing step S21015, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S21002, when it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S21002: YES), the process proceeds to step S21016 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driving state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big winning opening 36a is open, on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 36a or that the game balls of the opening limit number have entered. The driving state of the variable winning drive section 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S21016, the process proceeds to step S21017.

In step S21017, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21016: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21017: YES), the process advances to step S21018 to turn off the open/close processing period flag. After executing step S21018, the process proceeds to step S21019.

In step S21019, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S21019, the process proceeds to step S21020.

In step S21020, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM64. After executing step S21020, the process proceeds to step S21021.

In step S21021, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20503 in the normal processing (FIG. 40). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command, and starts controlling various devices so that the ending effect is executed. After executing step S21021, the process proceeds to step S21022.

In step S21022, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21001 that the ending period flag is ON (S21001: YES), the process proceeds to step S21023.

In step S21023, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21019), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step S21023, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S21023: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21023 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S21023: YES), the process proceeds to step S21024.

In step S21024, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S21025 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21025, the process advances to step S21026 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Opening time setting processing>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 45: S21007).

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the opening time setting process. In step S21101, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. In step S21101, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, if the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered (S21101: NO ), the process advances to step S21102 to set (set) a value of "5000" corresponding to 10 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and terminate this opening time setting process.

On the other hand, in step S21101, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, if the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is entered (S21101 : YES), the process advances to step S21103 to set a value of "3475" corresponding to 6.95 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and the present opening time setting process ends.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 45: S21016).

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S21201, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step S21201 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S21201: NO), the process proceeds to step S21202 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S21202, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21202: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21202: NO), the process proceeds to step S21203.

In step S21203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21203: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S21203, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21203: YES), the process proceeds to step S21204, in order to open the big winning opening 36a variable winning driving section 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step S21205.

In step S21205, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S21205, the process advances to step S21206.

In step S21206, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 40: step S20503). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the content of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 is set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S21201, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step S21201: YES), the process proceeds to step S21207, in which it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S21207: NO), the process proceeds to step S21208.

In step S21208, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S21208 that no ball has entered (S21208: NO), the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21208 that a ball has entered (S21208: YES), the process proceeds to step S21209, and 1 is subtracted from the winning counter area PC. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21210.

In step S21210, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S21210 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S21210: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S21207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S21207: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S21210 In (S21210: YES), the process proceeds to step S21211 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S21212.

In step S21212, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21213 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S21213, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S21213: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S21213: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S21214, the process advances to step S21215 to set a close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a is completed, and is a command that includes information for normal processing. command output processing ( FIG. 40 : step S20503), it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to match what you have done.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 45: S21024).

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S21301, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S21301, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S21301: YES), the process proceeds to step S21302 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S21302, the process advances to step S21303.

In step S21303, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the flow advances to step S21304 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step S21305.

In step S21305, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the process proceeds to step S21309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21301 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S21301: NO), the process advances to step S21306 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process proceeds to step S21307.

In step S21307, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S21308, and 100 is set in the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21309.

In step S21309, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 40: S20508).

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S21401, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S21401 that the supported flag is not ON (S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21402.

In step S21402, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S21402 that the support winning flag is not ON (S21402: NO), the process proceeds to step S21403.

In step S21403, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S21403 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21403: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21403: YES), the process proceeds to step S21404.

In step S21404, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general unit . If it is determined in step S21404 that it is time to end the variable display (S21404: YES), the process advances to step S21405 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21404 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S21404: NO), the process proceeds to step S21406.

In step S21406, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S21406, when it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S21406: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S21406 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0" (S21406: YES), the process proceeds to step S21407.

In step S21407, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S21408 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step S21407 (S21407: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step S21408 (S21408: YES), the process proceeds to step S21409, and an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21410.

In step S21410, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S21409 is support winning. In step S21410, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S21410: YES), the process proceeds to step S21411, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S21412. On the other hand, in step S21410, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S21410: NO), the process proceeds to step S21412 without executing the processing of step S21411.

In step S21412, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S21412 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S21412: YES), the process proceeds to step S21413. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21412 that the winning/failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S21412: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S21413, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S21413, if it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S21413: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21413 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S21414 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S21415.

In step S21415, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S21415 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of normal processing (FIG. 40: step S20503). Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S21407 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S21407: YES), or if it is determined in step S21418 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S21408: NO), the process proceeds to step S21416, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S21417.

In step S21417, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S21416 is support winning. In step S21417, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S21417: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S21417, if it is determined that the support is won (S21417: YES), the process advances to step S21418 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S21402 that the support winning flag is ON (S21402: YES), the process advances to step S21419 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S21419, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21419: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21419: YES), the process proceeds to step S21420.

In step S21420, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S21421 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S21401, if it is determined that the supporting flag is ON (S21401: YES), the process advances to step S21422 to execute electric opening/closing control processing for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 49: S21422).

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing control process. In step S21501, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S21501: YES), the process proceeds to step S21502.

In step S21502, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21502: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process ends. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S21502, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21502: YES), the process proceeds to step S21503 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S21503, the process advances to step S21504.

In step S21504, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the flow advances to step S21505 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S21505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S21505: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S21505: YES), the process advances to step S21506 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S21501, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21507 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S21507 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S21507: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S21507: YES), the process advances to step S21508 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S21509.

In step S21509, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S21509: NO), the process advances to step S21510 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S21510 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S21510: YES), the flow advances to step S21511 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21509 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (S21509: YES), or if it is determined that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode in step S21510 (S21510: NO), the process proceeds to step S21512, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

B5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 51 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

B6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. As shown in FIG. Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S21601, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S21601, the process advances to step S21602.

In step S21602, command handling processing is executed. Command correspondence processing is processing executed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62 . The details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S21602, the process advances to step S21603.

In step S21603, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the command handling process of step S21602. After executing step S21603, the process advances to step S21604.

In step S21604, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S21602. After executing step S21604, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 52: S21602).

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 . In step S21701, it is determined whether a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S21701 that a high-frequency support mode command has been received (S21701: YES), the process advances to step S21702 to turn on the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. to The sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to grasp the state of the support mode type in the main controller 60 . After executing step S21702, the process advances to step S21703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21701 that the high frequency support mode command has not been received (S21701: NO), the process proceeds to step S21703 without executing the process of step S21702.

In step S21703, it is determined whether or not a low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step S21703 that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (S21703: YES), the process advances to step S21704 to turn off the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. to Then, it progresses to step S21705 and sets so that left-handed information production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start the output control and the light emission control of the sound corresponding to the left-handed informing effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S21706, and a left-handed information effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting the left-handed information effect to be executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S21707.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21703 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (S21703: NO), the process advances to step S21707 without executing steps S21704 to S21706.

In step S21707, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU62. In step S21707, when it is determined that an opening command has been received (S21707: YES), the process proceeds to step S21708, and setting is made to execute opening effect for 7 seconds and hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds. Specifically, it is set to start the output control and light emission control of the sound corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the output of the sound corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. Set to start control and lighting control. After that, the process proceeds to step S21709, and an opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect. Thereafter, the process advances to step S21710.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21707 that the opening command has not been received (S21707: NO), the processing proceeds to step S21710 without executing the processing of steps S21708 and S21709.

In step S21710, it is determined whether or not an opening start command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S21710, when it determines with having received the opening start command (S21710:YES), it progresses to step S21711 and sets so that a round production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the round effect. At this time, the control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed, and if it has already been set to execute the right-handed informing effect, the control corresponding to the opening effect is terminated, and the right-handed informing effect is executed. Cancel the setting and set to start the control corresponding to the round production. Therefore, when the opening start command is received 6.95 seconds after the opening command is received, the right-handed informing effect is not executed, and on the other hand, the opening start command is received 10 seconds after the opening command is received. When it does, the hitting to the right information production will be executed. After executing step S21711, the process advances to step S21712 to transmit a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute a round effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S21713.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21710 that the opening start command has not been received (S21710: NO), the processing proceeds to step S21713 without executing the processing of steps S21711 and S21712.

In step S21713, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU62. In step S21713, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S21713: YES), the process proceeds to step S21714, and setting is made to execute the ending effect. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the ending effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S21715, and an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect is transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S21716.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21713 that the ending command has not been received (S21713: NO), the processing proceeds to step S21716 without executing the processing of steps S21714 and S21715.

In step S21716, if another command has been received, the process corresponding to that command is executed. For example, when a variation command and a type command are received, the type of effect to be executed in the game round is determined based on these commands, and the determined effect is set to be executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S21801, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process advances to step S21802.

In step S21802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S21901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S22001, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 55) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In the command processing (S22001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 . Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step S22002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S22001), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . Then, it progresses to step S22003.

In step S22003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S22002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S22004.

In step S22004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S22003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S22005, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of the V interrupt process (FIG. 56: S22001).

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S22101, it is determined whether or not a left-handed notification effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a left-handed notification effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22101, when it determines with the left-handed information production command being memorize|stored (S22101:YES), it progresses to step S22102 and sets so that left-handed information production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the left-handed informing effect. After executing step S22102, the process advances to step S22103. On the other hand, in step S22101, when it determines with the left-handed information production|presentation command not memorize|stored (S22101:NO), it progresses to step S22103, without performing the process of step S22102.

In step S22103, it is determined whether or not an opening effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22103, when it is determined that the opening effect command is stored (S22103: YES), the process advances to step S22104 to set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds. Specifically, it is set to start drawing and display control of an image corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the drawing of the image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is performed. and to start controlling the display. After executing step S22104, the process advances to step S22105. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22103 that the opening effect command is not stored (S22103: NO), the process proceeds to step S22105 without executing the process of step S22104.

In step S22105, it is determined whether or not a round effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92 . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a round effect command. In step S22105, when it determines with the round production|presentation command being memorize|stored (S22105:YES), it progresses to step S22106 and sets so that a round production|presentation may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the round effect. At this time, the control corresponding to the opening effect is being executed, and if it has already been set to execute the right-handed informing effect, the control corresponding to the opening effect is terminated, and the right-handed informing effect is executed. Cancel the setting and set to start the control corresponding to the round production. Therefore, when the round effect command is received 6.95 seconds after the opening effect command is received, the right-handed informing effect is not executed. is received, the hitting to the right notification effect is executed. After executing step S22106, the process advances to step S22107. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22105 that the round effect command is not stored (S22105: NO), the process proceeds to step S22107 without executing the process of step S22106.

In step S22107, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22107, when it determines with the ending production command being memorize|stored (S22107:YES), it progresses to step S22108 and sets so that an ending production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the ending effect. After executing step S22108, the process advances to step S22109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22107 that the ending effect command is not stored (S22107: NO), the process proceeds to step S22109 without executing the process of step S22108.

In step S22109, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

According to this embodiment described above, the following effects are obtained.

In the ordinary pachinko machine 10, when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to sequentially execute a plurality of effects, the main controller 60 issues a command to the sound emission control device 90 to execute each effect. 90 respectively. Therefore, as the number of effects to be executed by the sound emission control device 90 increases, the number of times the main controller 60 transmits commands to the sound emission control device 90 increases.

Specifically, as shown in the comparative example of FIG. 35, when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, then the right-handed notification effect is executed, and then the round effect is executed, After transmitting the opening command to the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 transmits a right-handed notification command, and further transmits an opening start command. In this case, main control device 60 will transmit the command to sound emission control device 90 three times. Further, when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect and then the round effect is executed without executing the right-handed informing effect, the main control device 60 transmits an opening command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the release start command is transmitted without transmitting the right-handed information command. In this case, main control device 60 will transmit the command to sound emission control device 90 twice. That is, in the ordinary pachinko machine 10, when the sound emission control device 90 is not caused to execute the right-handed informing effect, the main control device 60 may transmit the command to the sound emission control device 90 twice. When causing the control device 90 to execute the right-handed informing effect, the main control device 60 transmits the command to the sound emission control device 90 three times.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening start command while sequentially executing a plurality of effects set by receiving the opening command, the effect being executed is finished and the round effect is executed. Even if the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the round effect without executing some of the effects, the main control device 60 may transmit the opening command and the opening start command to the sound emission control device 90. . That is, in either case, main controller 60 only needs to send the command to sound emission control device 90 twice.

Specifically, according to the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 sets such that when an opening command is received, the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect are sequentially executed. Then, when the opening performance is being executed and the opening start command is received at the timing before the right-handed informing performance is executed, the opening performance being executed is ended and is set to be executed after the opening performance. A round performance is executed without executing the right-handed informing performance. That is, the sound emission control device 90 of the present embodiment executes overwrite processing, not parallel processing, standby processing, or invalidation processing, when an opening start command is received during execution of the opening effect. Overwrite processing means that when a new command to set another effect to be executed is received while the effect is being executed, the effect being executed is terminated, and the effect is executed after the effect being executed. If there is an effect that is set to be executed, the setting is erased, and the setting is overwritten to execute the effect corresponding to the newly received command, and the set effect is executed. be. Parallel processing means that when a command for setting another effect to be executed is newly received while the effect is being executed, the effect being executed and the effect corresponding to the received command are received. These are processes that are executed in parallel at the same time. Standby processing means that when a command for setting another effect to be executed is newly received while the effect is being executed, it is set to be executed after the effect being executed and after the effect being executed. It is a process of waiting until the given effects are completed, and executing the effects corresponding to the received commands after these effects are completed. Invalidation processing means that when a new command to set another effect to be executed is received while the effect is being executed, the received command is invalidated and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. processing.

According to the present embodiment, even when the round effect is executed by the sound emission control device 90 after the opening effect and the right-handed informing effect are executed, the right-handed informing effect is executed after the opening effect is executed. Even in the case where the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the round effect without executing , the main control device 60 may transmit the opening command and the opening start command to the sound emission control device 90 . That is, the main controller 60 only needs to send the command to the sound emission control device 90 twice, regardless of whether the sound emission control device 90 is to execute the right-handed informing effect or not. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the frequency of command transmission from main controller 60 can be reduced, and the processing load on main controller 60 can be reduced. Further, according to the present embodiment, since the right-handed notification command shown in the comparative example of FIG. 35 is not required, the right-handed notification command need not be stored in the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63. . Therefore, of the storage capacity of the main ROM 63, the storage capacity required for storing the right-handed informing command can be effectively utilized for other purposes.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, when the opening start command is transmitted after the main control device 60 transmits the opening command, the intervals between the transmissions are different, so that the effects executed by the sound emission control device 90 are different. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the main controller 60 transmits commands of various contents to the sound emission control device 90 in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute effects of various contents, the main The processing load on the control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Specifically, according to the present embodiment, main controller 60 transmits the opening start command 10 seconds after transmitting the opening command, in the first transmission mode ((A) in FIG. 34), and , and the second transmission mode ((B) in FIG. 34) in which the opening start command is transmitted 6.95 seconds after the opening command is transmitted. Then, when the main controller 60 executes the first transmission mode, the sound emission control device 90 becomes the performance mode in which the right-handed informing performance is executed after the opening performance is executed. When the transmission mode of (1) is executed, the performance mode is such that the right-handed informing performance is not executed after the opening performance is executed. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect and then the right-handed notification effect is executed, the sound emission control device 90 is made to execute the opening effect. Even if the right-handed informing effect is not executed, the main controller 60 only needs to transmit the opening start command after transmitting the opening command. In addition to transmitting the opening command, when executing the right hitting notification effect after executing the opening effect, the right hitting notification command for executing the right hitting notification effect is transmitted, and after executing the opening effect, the right hitting notification effect is transmitted. Compared to the configuration (configuration of the comparative example shown in FIG. 35) that executes control such as not transmitting a right-handed notification command for executing the right-handed notification performance when not executing the hitting notification performance, the main control The processing load of the device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main-side ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the main control device 60 executes the first transmission mode ((A) in FIG. 34), the sound emission control device 90 executes the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect. When the main controller 60 executes the second transmission mode ((B) in FIG. 34), the right-handed informing effect is not executed after the opening effect is executed. It becomes a production mode in which the round production is executed at . Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, the right-handed notification effect is executed, and then the round effect is executed, the sound emission control device 90 Even if the round effect is executed without executing the right-handed informing effect after the opening effect is executed, the main controller 60 only needs to transmit the opening start command after transmitting the opening command. For example, when transmitting an opening command for executing the opening effect to the sound emission control device 90, and executing the hitting right notification effect after executing the opening effect, the right hitting notification effect is executed. When the hitting notification command is transmitted and the hitting right notification effect is not executed after the opening effect is executed, the hitting right notification command for executing the hitting right notification effect is not transmitted, and the opening effect or the hitting right notification effect is performed. In the case of executing the round effect after executing, compared to the configuration of executing control such as transmitting an opening start command for executing the round effect (configuration of the comparative example shown in FIG. 35), the main The processing load on the control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main controller 60 sequentially transmits the opening command and the opening start command based on the state of the support mode when the jackpot lottery in which the jackpot has been won is executed. After determining the interval and receiving the opening command and the opening start command, the sound emission control device 90 enters the support mode state when the big winning lottery is executed based on the fact that the intervals at which these commands are received are different. Execute the corresponding performance. Therefore, compared with the configuration in which the main controller 60 transmits various commands with different contents to the sound emission control device 90 in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute an effect corresponding to the state of the support mode, the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the recommended shooting mode (hitting method) of the game ball changes from "left hitting" to "right hitting" by the start of the opening/closing processing period of the opening/closing execution mode ("left hitting" When a jackpot is won during the middle low frequency support mode), the right-handed notification effect is executed, and the recommended shooting mode (how to hit) of the game ball is " If the "right hit" remains unchanged (if a jackpot is won during the high-frequency support mode during "right hit"), the right hit notification effect is not executed. Therefore, while reducing the processing load of the main controller 60, it is possible to execute an appropriate mode of presentation corresponding to the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main controller 60 determines the length of the opening period based on the state of the support mode, and the sound emission control device 90 controls the opening effect and the right hand stroke regardless of the state of the support mode. Although the same process of setting to execute the notification effect is executed, the contents of the effect to be executed in the opening period are configured to differ according to the state of the support mode. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 can execute an effect suitable for the length of the opening period without executing different processing depending on the state of the support mode. That is, even if the sound emission control device 90 does not grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60 and executes processing according to the state of the support mode, the opening period that changes according to the state of the support mode Since it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the length, the processing load of the sound emission control device 90 can be reduced.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when receiving an opening command, the sound emission control device 90 sequentially executes a plurality of effects (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) regardless of the state of the support mode. When the opening start command is received during the sequential execution of multiple processes set by receiving the opening command, the effect being executed is terminated and the round effect is executed. . In this embodiment, the interval from when the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command to when it receives the opening start command varies depending on the state of the support mode. Of the plurality of produced effects, the shorter the interval, the more the effects that are actually executed. That is, according to the present embodiment, when the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command, by executing a simple process of setting to sequentially execute a plurality of effects regardless of the state of the support mode, It is possible to make the content of the presentation executed during the opening period different according to the state of the support mode.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when an opening command is received, the sound emission control device 90 sequentially performs an opening effect and a right-handed notification effect as a plurality of effects regardless of the state of the support mode. When the opening command is set to be executed and the opening start command is received before executing the right-handed informing performance after receiving the opening command, the round performance is executed without executing the right-handed informing performance. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the interval from when the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command to when it receives the opening start command varies according to the state of the support mode, so that the right-handed notification effect is executed. It may or may not. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, when the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command, a simple process of setting to sequentially execute the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect regardless of the state of the support mode is performed. By executing it, it becomes possible to make it different according to the state of the support mode whether or not the hitting to the right notification effect is executed in the opening period.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to the right-handed notification effect after the opening effect starts. is set to a time shorter than 7 seconds (6.95 seconds in this embodiment), which is the time until the start of the opening effect (time for the opening effect). Even if is delayed, it is possible to suppress the reception of the opening start command by the sound emission control device 90 after the execution of the right-handed informing effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress execution of the right-handed informing effect even though the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode ((B) in FIG. 34).

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the sound emission control device 90 fails to receive the opening start command, the right-handed informing effect is only executed after the opening effect. Since the player only has to hit "right" during the opening/closing processing period, even if the right-hand hitting notification performance is executed in an unintended situation in terms of control, the player will not be put in a disadvantageous situation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that executes control so that the player is not disadvantaged even if a problem occurs.

B7. Modified example of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration and processing as those of the above-described embodiment is omitted.

B7-1. Variant 1:
FIG. 58 is a timing chart explaining an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 1 of the second embodiment. The main difference from the second embodiment described above is that when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high frequency support mode, the main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 4 seconds, and the voice The light emission control device 90 grasps the type of the support mode, and when the opening command is received, is it set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed information effect for 3 seconds, or is it set to execute? The point is that it is determined based on the type of the support mode whether or not to set to execute a short opening effect that is completed (finished) in a short time (4 seconds in this modified example). Specific processing will be described below.

First, the process when a big win is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 58(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 58, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10, when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode, the opening period is set to 10 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

Upon receiving the opening command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode. As will be described later, when the main controller 60 shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 sends a high-frequency support mode command to the sound emission control device 90 indicating that the mode has shifted to the high-frequency support mode. , and upon receiving the high frequency support mode command from the main controller 60 , the audio emission control device 90 turns on the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 . Then, when the main control device 60 shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the main controller 60 transmits a low-frequency support mode command indicating that the mode has shifted to the low-frequency support mode to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the low frequency support mode command from the main controller 60 , the sound emission control device 90 turns off the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 . Therefore, the sound emission control device 90 can always grasp the type of the support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the sound and light side support mode flag. When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is not the high-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and an opening effect for 3 seconds. Set to execute the right hitting notification effect. That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

After setting the sound emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect, the display control device 100 issues an opening effect command for setting to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, it is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed informing effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period ends, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the pattern display device 41 .

It should be noted that, also in the present modified example 1, similarly to the above-described embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Also in this modified example 1, during the high-frequency support mode, it is recommended to hit the game ball to the right side of the game area PA, which is the "right hit". Also in the present modified example 1, since the hitting to the right notification effect is executed in the open/close execution mode, many players recognize the hitting to the right notification effect and execute the "beat to the right". Then, the player who has executed the "right hit" in the opening/closing execution mode continues to "right hit" in the high frequency support mode even after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 58(B), a description will be given of the processing when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode. The main difference from the processing in the case of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode is that main controller 60 sets the length of the opening period to 4 seconds, and transmits the opening start command instead of the opening command. 4 seconds after the transmission of the opening command, and the audio light emission control device 90 that received the opening command determines that it is not in the high frequency support mode, sets to execute the short opening effect, and executes the right hitting notification effect. The point is that the round production is executed without A specific description will be given below.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 58, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10, when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the opening period is set to 4 seconds to start the opening period, and an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

Upon receiving the opening command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode. Then, when the sound emission control device 90 determines that the type of the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, it sets to execute a short opening effect for 4 seconds. After setting to execute the short opening effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a short opening effect command for setting to execute the short opening effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the short opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the short opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are illuminated in a light emission pattern corresponding to the short opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so as to emit light.

When receiving the short opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 sets to execute the short opening effect for 4 seconds and starts control corresponding to the short opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the short opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

When the opening period set to 4 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when an opening start command is received from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the four-second short opening effect. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after completing the control corresponding to the four-second short opening effect, the display control device 100 sets so as to execute the round effect and responds to the round effect. Start controlling. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period ends, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the pattern display device 41 .

Thus, in this modification, when the player wins a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode in which the player is executing "left-handed", the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are executed. It is possible to suggest to the player that it has moved to the run mode and to recommend "right hitting", and to win a big win in the jackpot lottery during the high frequency support mode in which the player has already performed "right hitting". When winning, the short opening performance shorter than the opening performance is executed and the right-handed informing performance is not executed, so that the game can be given a sense of speed more than the above-described second embodiment, and the amusement of the game is improved. can be achieved.

<Various processing executed in the main controller of Modification 1>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 of Modification 1 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the second embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Opening time setting processing>
The opening time setting process in Modification 1 will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 45: S21007). The main difference from the opening time setting process in the second embodiment described above is that the length of the opening time is set to 4 seconds when the high frequency support mode flag is ON. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the opening time setting process executed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. In step S22201, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is ON. In step S22201, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON, that is, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode (S22201: NO ), the process advances to step S22202 to set (set) a value of "5000" corresponding to 10 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and this opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step S22201, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, if the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution mode is entered (S22201 : YES), the process advances to step S22203 to set (set) a value of "2000" corresponding to 4 seconds in the third timer counter area T3, and this opening time setting process ends.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device of Modification 1>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 1 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the second embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Command response processing>
Command handling processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 1 will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 52: S21602). The main difference from the command correspondence processing (FIG. 53) in the second embodiment described above is that when the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is ON, the short opening effect is set to be executed. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. In step S22301, it is determined whether or not a high-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S22301 that a high-frequency support mode command has been received (S22301: YES), the process advances to step S22302 to turn on the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. to The sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is a flag for the sound and light side MPU 92 to grasp the state of the support mode type in the main controller 60 . After executing step S22302, the process proceeds to step S22303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22301 that the high frequency support mode command has not been received (S22301: NO), the process proceeds to step S22303 without executing the process of step S22302.

In step S22303, it is determined whether or not a low-frequency support mode command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step S22303 that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (S22303: YES), the process advances to step S22304 to turn off the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. to Then, it progresses to step S22305 and it sets so that left-handed information production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start the output control and the light emission control of the sound corresponding to the left-handed informing effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22306, and an opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting to execute the left-handed notification effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22303 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (S22303: NO), the processing proceeds to step S22307 without executing the processing of steps S22304 to S22306.

In step S22307, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU62. If it is determined in step S22307 that the opening command has not been received (S22307: NO), the process proceeds to step S22313 without executing the processes from step S22308 to step S22312 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22307 that an opening command has been received (S22307: YES), the process advances to step S22308 to determine whether or not the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is ON. In step S22308, if it is determined that the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (S22308: NO), proceed to step S22309, so as to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds set to Specifically, it is set to start the output control and light emission control of the sound corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the output of the sound corresponding to the right-handed notification effect. Set to start control and lighting control. After that, the process proceeds to step S22310, and an opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22308 that the sound/light side high-frequency support mode flag is ON (S22308: YES), the process proceeds to step S22311, and setting is made to execute a four-second short opening effect. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the short opening effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22310, and a short opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 for setting to execute the short opening effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22313.

In step S22313, it is determined whether or not an opening start command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S22313, when it determines with having received the opening start command (S22313: YES), it progresses to step S22314 and it sets so that a round production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the round effect. Here, in the present modified example 1, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 transmits the opening start command 10 seconds after transmitting the opening command. Then, when the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, upon receiving the opening command, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds are executed. set. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered during the low-frequency support mode, the opening effect is executed for 7 seconds, followed by the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds, and then the round effect is executed. Become. On the other hand, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode during the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 transmits the opening start command four seconds after transmitting the opening command. Then, when the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode during the high-frequency support mode, upon receiving the opening command, it is set to execute a four-second short opening effect. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered during the high-frequency support mode, the round production is executed after the short opening production for 4 seconds is executed. After executing step S22314, the process advances to step S22315 to transmit a round effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute a round effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22313 that the opening start command has not been received (S22313: NO), the process proceeds to step S22316 without executing the processes of steps S22314 and S22315.

In step S22316, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU62. In step S22316, when it determines with having received the ending command (S22316:YES), it progresses to step S22317 and sets so that ending production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start output control of sound and light emission control corresponding to the ending effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S22318, and an ending effect command for setting the display control device 100 to execute the ending effect is transmitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S22319.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22316 that the ending command has not been received (S22316: NO), the process advances to step S22319 without executing the processes of steps S22317 and S22318.

In step S22319, if another command has been received, the process corresponding to that command is executed. For example, when a variation command and a type command are received, the type of effect to be executed in the game round is determined based on these commands, and the determined effect is set to be executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device of Modification 1>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of Modification 1 will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the second embodiment will be described, and description of processing that is the same as that of the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Command response processing>
Command handling processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of Modification 1 will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of the V interrupt process (FIG. 56: S22001). The main difference from the command correspondence processing (FIG. 57) in the second embodiment described above is that the short opening effect is set to be executed when the short opening effect command is received. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. In step S22401, it is determined whether or not a left-handed notification effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a left-handed notification effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22401, when it determines with the left-handed information production command being memorize|stored (S22401:YES), it progresses to step S22402 and sets so that left-handed information production may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the left-handed informing effect. After executing step S22402, the process advances to step S22403. On the other hand, in step S22401, when it determines with the left-handed information production|presentation command not memorize|stored (S22401:NO), it progresses to step S22403, without performing the process of step S22402.

In step S22403, it is determined whether or not an opening effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22403, when it is determined that the opening effect command is stored (S22403: YES), the process proceeds to step S22404, and setting is made to execute the opening effect and the right-handed informing effect. Specifically, it is set to start drawing and display control of an image corresponding to the opening effect, and after the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is drawn. and to start controlling the display. After executing step S22404, the process advances to step S22405. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22403 that the opening effect command is not stored (S22403: NO), the process proceeds to step S22405 without executing the process of step S22404.

In step S22405, it is determined whether or not a short opening effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a short opening effect command. If it is determined in step S22405 that the short opening effect command is stored (S22405: YES), the process advances to step S22406 to set the short opening effect to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start controlling the drawing and display of an image corresponding to the short opening effect. After executing step S22406, the process advances to step S22407. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22405 that the short opening effect command is not stored (S22405: NO), the process proceeds to step S22407 without executing the process of step S22406.

In step S22407, it is determined whether or not a round effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 stores a round effect command. In step S22407, when it determines with the round production|presentation command being memorize|stored (S22407:YES), it progresses to step S22408 and sets so that a round production|presentation may be performed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the round effect. Here, in the present modified example 1, when shifting to the open/close execution mode during the low frequency support mode, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 transmits the round effect command 10 seconds after transmitting the opening effect command. do. Then, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command in the case of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds are executed. set. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered during the low-frequency support mode, the opening effect is executed for 7 seconds, followed by the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds, and then the round effect is executed. Become. On the other hand, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode during the high frequency support mode, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 transmits the round effect command 4 seconds after transmitting the short opening effect command. Then, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives the short opening effect command in the case of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode during the high frequency support mode, it sets to execute the short opening effect for 4 seconds. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered during the high-frequency support mode, the round production is executed after the short opening production for 4 seconds is executed. After executing step S22408, the process advances to step S22409. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22407 that the round effect command is not stored (S22407: NO), the process proceeds to step S22409 without executing the process of step S22408.

In step S22409, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 92. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104 . In step S22409, when it is determined that the ending effect command is stored (S22409: YES), the process advances to step S22410 to set the ending effect to be executed. Specifically, it is set to start control of drawing and display of an image corresponding to the ending effect. After executing step S22410, the process advances to step S22411. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S22409 that the ending effect command is not stored (S22409: NO), the process proceeds to step S22411 without executing the process of step S22410.

In step S22411, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. After that, the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

According to Modification 1 described above, in addition to the effects of the second embodiment described above, the following effects are obtained.

According to the present modification 1, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and even if it receives a command with the same content from the main control device 60, However, since effects with different contents are executed according to the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 issues commands with various contents in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute effects with various contents. to the sound emission control device 90, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main side ROM 63 can be reduced. .

Specifically, according to the present modified example 1, the sound emission control device 90 executes an opening effect when receiving an opening command during the low-frequency support mode, and receives an opening command during the high-frequency support mode. If so, a short opening effect is executed. Therefore, even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, and even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the short opening effect, the main control device 60 controls the opening effect of the same content. Since it is only necessary to transmit a command, for example, when causing the sound emission control device 90 to execute an opening effect, a command for executing the opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 is short-circuited. In the case of executing the opening effect, the processing load of the main controller 60 can be reduced compared to the configuration in which a command for executing the short opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the main side The storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the first modification, when the opening command is received during the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 executes the opening effect and then the right-handed notification effect. The control device 60 transmits an opening command for executing an opening effect to the sound emission control device 90, and further transmits a right-handed notification command for executing a right-handed notification effect (comparative example shown in FIG. 35). configuration), the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main-side ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to Modification 1, main controller 60 transmits a high-frequency support mode command or low-frequency support mode command when the support mode changes, and audio emission control device 90 transmits high-frequency support mode command is received, the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and when a low frequency support mode command is received, the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag. Therefore, main controller 60 does not need to include information about the state of the support mode in the opening command in order to let sound emission control device 90 grasp the state of the support mode, so main controller 60 transmits the opening command. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of processing.

Furthermore, according to the first modification, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot during the low-frequency support mode, the opening for 10 seconds after the end of the game round (symbol fluctuation) that resulted in the jackpot After the period has elapsed, the opening and closing processing period starts, and if the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot during the high-frequency support mode, 4 seconds after the end of the game round (symbol fluctuation) that resulted in the jackpot Since the opening/closing processing period is started after the opening period has elapsed, it is possible to impart a sense of speed to the game during the high-frequency support mode, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Specifically, during the high-frequency support mode, which is advantageous to the player, since the jackpot lottery is frequently executed, there is a sense of anticipation that the jackpot will be won in the jackpot lottery and the opening/closing processing period will start. becomes higher. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the opening/closing processing period will start earlier than the opening/closing processing period itself. That is, during the high-frequency support mode, the player seeks a sense of speed in the game. According to Modification 1, during the high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing processing period is started in a shorter time after the end of the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, compared to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, a sense of speed can be imparted to the game during the high-frequency support mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present modification 1, when the opening command is received during the low-frequency support mode, the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds are executed in the opening period of 10 seconds, and the high-frequency When an opening command is received during the support mode, a 4-second short opening effect is executed in the 4-second opening period, so the length of the effect is suitable for each of the 10-second opening period and the 4-second opening period. can be executed.

B7-2. Modification 2:
FIG. 62 is a timing chart for explaining an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 2 of the second embodiment. The main difference from the modified example 1 of the second embodiment described above is that the length of the opening period is set to 10 seconds by the main controller 60 regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Then, the sound emission control device 90 grasps the type of the support mode, and when the opening command is received, is it set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds, or is the opening The point is that it is determined based on the type of support mode whether to set to execute a long opening effect that completes (ends) in a longer time (10 seconds in this modified example) than the effect. In the present embodiment, the content of the 7-second long opening effect from the start to 7 seconds in the 10-second long opening effect is the same as the content of the 7-second opening effect, and the 3-second long opening effect from 7 to 10 seconds is the same. The contents of the production are productions of different contents that are newly added (for example, productions in which a different character that does not appear in the opening production for 7 seconds appears). Specific processing will be described below.

First, the process when a big win is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 62(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 62, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Along with starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60, it determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode by referring to the sound and light side support mode flag. When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is not the high-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and an opening effect for 3 seconds. Set to execute the right hitting notification effect. That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

After setting the sound emission control device 90 to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect, the display control device 100 issues an opening effect command for setting to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, it is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed informing effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period, and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period ends, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the pattern display device 41 .

Next, referring to FIG. 62(B), a description will be given of the processing when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode. The main difference from the processing in the case of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode described above is that the sound emission control device 90 that received the opening command determines that the high frequency support mode is not set and performs the long opening effect. The point is to set it to run. A specific description will be given below.

As shown in FIG. 62(B), the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Along with starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60, it determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode by referring to the sound and light side support mode flag. Then, when the sound emission control device 90 determines that the type of the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it sets to execute the long opening effect for 10 seconds. After setting to execute the long opening effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a long opening effect command for setting to execute the long opening effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the long opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the long opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are illuminated in a light emission pattern corresponding to the long opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so as to emit light.

When receiving the long opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 sets to execute the long opening effect for 10 seconds and starts control corresponding to the long opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the long opening effect on the pattern display device 41 .

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period, and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute a round effect when receiving an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the long opening effect of 10 seconds. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the long opening effect of 10 seconds, it sets to execute the round effect and responds to the round effect. Start controlling. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period ends, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the pattern display device 41 .

According to Modification 2 described above, in addition to the effects of the above-described embodiment and Modification 1, the following effects are obtained.

According to the present modified example 2, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and even if it receives a command with the same content from the main control device 60, However, since effects with different contents are executed according to the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 issues commands with various contents in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute effects with various contents. to the sound emission control device 90, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. .

Specifically, according to Modified Example 2, the sound emission control device 90 executes an opening effect when receiving an opening command during the low-frequency support mode, and receives an opening command during the high-frequency support mode. If so, a long opening effect is executed. Therefore, even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, and even when the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the long opening effect, the main control device 60 controls the same opening effect. Since it is only necessary to transmit a command, for example, when causing the sound emission control device 90 to execute an opening effect, a command for executing the opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 In the case of executing the opening effect, the processing load of the main controller 60 can be reduced compared to the configuration in which a command for executing the long opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the main side The storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the second modification, when the opening command is received during the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 executes the opening effect and then the right-handed notification effect. The control device 60 transmits an opening command for executing an opening effect to the sound emission control device 90, and further transmits a right-handed notification command for executing a right-handed notification effect (comparative example shown in FIG. 35). configuration), the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main-side ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to Modification 2, main controller 60 transmits a high-frequency support mode command or a low-frequency support mode command when the support mode changes, and audio emission control device 90 transmits a high-frequency support mode command is received, the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, and when a low frequency support mode command is received, the sound and light side high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Then, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60 by referring to the sound and light side high-frequency support mode flag. Therefore, main controller 60 does not need to include information about the state of the support mode in the opening command in order to let sound emission control device 90 grasp the state of the support mode, so main controller 60 transmits the opening command. It is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of

Furthermore, according to the present modified example 2, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and based on the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, the opening command Since the content of the effect to be executed is determined in the opening period, which is the period from the reception of the It is possible to transmit the opening command and the opening start command in the same transmission manner each time without changing the manner of transmitting the opening command and the opening start command. Therefore, it is possible to omit the control necessary for changing the transmission mode in which the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode, and reduce the processing load of the main controller 60. can be reduced. Moreover, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. Further, according to the second modification, the main controller 60 sends commands of various contents to the sound emission control device 90 in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute effects of various contents according to the state of the support mode. The processing load on main controller 60 can be reduced compared to the configuration for transmission.

Furthermore, according to the present modified example 2, the main controller 60 determines whether the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. Set the length of the to 10 seconds. That is, the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command at the same interval even if the state of the support mode when winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is different. Therefore, according to the present modified example 2, it is possible to omit the control necessary for changing the interval at which the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode. The processing load of the control device 60 can be reduced. Moreover, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Further, according to the present modified example 2, when the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs the opening effect in the front part of the opening period. Executes, and executes a right-handed informing effect in the latter part of the opening period. When the state of the support mode at the time of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is the high-frequency support mode, the long opening performance having the same content as the opening performance is performed for 0 to 7 seconds in the front part of the opening period. In the latter part of the opening period, the part from 7 seconds to 10 seconds of the long opening effect is executed. Therefore, according to the present modified example 2, the performance of the same contents is executed in the front part of the opening period regardless of the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, and in the latter part of the opening period, the performance of the main controller 60 is executed. Since an effect with different content is executed according to the state of the support mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to how the content of the effect will change from the front part to the rear part of the opening period. . Further, according to the second modification, it is possible to execute an effect including content suitable for the state of the support mode of main controller 60 in the latter part of the opening period.

B7-1. Variant 3:
FIG. 63 is a timing chart explaining an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 3 of the second embodiment. The main difference from the modified example 1 of the second embodiment described above is that the length of the opening period is set to 10 seconds by the main controller 60 regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Then, the sound emission control device 90 grasps the type of the support mode, and when the opening command is received, is it set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the right-handed notification effect for 3 seconds? The point is that it is determined based on the type of the support mode whether to set to execute the second opening effect and the round effect. Specific processing will be described below.

First, the process when a big win is won in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 63(A).

As shown in (A) of FIG. 63, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Along with starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60, it determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode by referring to the sound and light side support mode flag. When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is not the high-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs an opening effect for 7 seconds and an opening effect for 3 seconds. Set to execute the right hitting notification effect. That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

After the sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect, the display control device 100 is set to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect opening effect command. to send. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening effect command from the sound emission control device 90, it is set to execute the opening effect for 7 seconds and the hitting to the right notification effect for 3 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of the sound so that the sound corresponding to the right-handed informing effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps with a light emission pattern corresponding to the right-handed informing effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started so that the lamps 47 emit light. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the symbol display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the right-handed notification effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening start command from the main control device 60 after finishing the control corresponding to the right-handed informing effect for 3 seconds, it determines whether the control corresponding to the round effect is already being executed. is determined, and when it is determined that the control corresponding to the round performance is not being executed, the round performance is set to be executed. After setting to execute the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a round effect command for setting to execute the round effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the round effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives a round effect command from the sound emission control device 90 after finishing the control corresponding to the three-second right-handed notification effect, the display control device 100 sets to execute the round effect and supports the round effect. start control. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period ends, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the pattern display device 41 .

Next, referring to FIG. 63(B), a description will be given of the processing when a big win is won in the big win lottery in the high-frequency support mode. The main difference from the processing in the case of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low frequency support mode is that the sound emission control device 90 that received the opening command determines that it is not in the high frequency support mode, and the opening effect and the round are performed. It is a point to set so that production may be performed. A specific description will be given below.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 63, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 sets the length of the opening period to 10 seconds regardless of the type of support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. Along with starting the opening period, an opening command indicating that the opening period has started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

When the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the main control device 60, it determines whether or not the current support mode type is the high frequency support mode by referring to the sound and light side support mode flag. When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the main control device 60 and determines that the current support mode type is the high-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs an opening effect and a round effect for 7 seconds. set to run. That is, the sound emission control device 90 is set so as to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command.

After setting to execute the opening effect and the round effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening-round effect command for setting to execute the opening effect and the round effect. do. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the opening effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the opening effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the opening-round effect command from the sound emission control device 90, it sets to execute the opening effect and the round effect for 7 seconds. That is, the display control device 100 is set to continuously execute two processes (two effects in this embodiment) for one command. After that, the display control device 100 starts control corresponding to the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the opening effect.

When the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the sound emission control device 90 starts the control corresponding to the round effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the round effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above. Similarly, when the control corresponding to the opening effect for 7 seconds ends, the display control device 100 starts the control corresponding to the round effect set to be executed after the opening effect. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a moving image corresponding to the round effect.

When the opening period set to 10 seconds ends, the main controller 60 starts the opening/closing processing period, and transmits an opening start command indicating that the opening/closing processing period has started to the sound emission control device 90. .

When receiving the opening start command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the control corresponding to the round effect is already being executed, and determines that the control corresponding to the round effect is being executed. When determined, the opening start command is discarded, and the control corresponding to the round effect which is already being executed is continued. Therefore, in this case, the round effect command for setting to execute the round effect is not transmitted to the display control device 100 . However, the display control device 100 continues the control corresponding to the round effect that is already being executed.

When the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times and the opening/closing processing period ends, the main controller 60 starts the ending period and notifies the sound emission control device 90 of the ending period. Send an ending command indicating that

When receiving the ending command from the main controller 60, the sound emission control device 90 ends the control corresponding to the round effect and sets to execute the ending effect. After setting to execute the ending effect, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an ending effect command for setting to execute the ending effect. After that, the sound emission control device 90 starts control corresponding to the ending effect. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 starts output control of sound so that the sound corresponding to the ending effect is output from the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. Light emission control of the various lamps 47 is started as described above.

When the display control device 100 receives the ending performance command from the sound emission control device 90, the control corresponding to the round performance is terminated, the ending performance is set to be executed, and the control corresponding to the ending performance is started. Specifically, the display control device 100 starts control to display a moving image corresponding to the ending effect on the pattern display device 41 .

According to Modification 3 described above, in addition to the effects of the above-described embodiment, Modification 1, and Modification 2, the following effects are obtained.

According to the present modified example 3, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and even if the command of the same content is received from the main control device 60, However, since effects with different contents are executed according to the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 issues commands with various contents in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute effects with various contents. to the sound emission control device 90, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. .

Specifically, according to the present modified example 3, the sound emission control device 90 executes an opening effect when receiving an opening command during the low-frequency support mode, and receives an opening command during the high-frequency support mode. If so, the round effect is executed after the opening effect is executed. Therefore, even if the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, or even if the round effect is executed after the sound emission control device 90 is caused to execute the opening effect, the main controller 60 , it is sufficient to transmit an opening command having the same content. For example, when the sound emission control device 90 is to execute an opening effect, a command for executing the opening effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound is transmitted. In the case of causing the light emission control device 90 to execute the round effect after executing the opening effect, it is compared with a configuration in which a command for executing the round effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 after executing the opening effect. Therefore, the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the third modification, when the opening command is received during the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 executes the opening effect and then the right-handed notification effect. The control device 60 transmits an opening command for executing an opening effect to the sound emission control device 90, and further transmits a right-handed notification command for executing a right-handed notification effect (comparative example shown in FIG. 35). configuration), the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the command information storage area 63f of the main-side ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present modified example 3, the sound emission control device 90 can grasp the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, and based on the state of the support mode of the main control device 60, the opening command Since the content of the effect to be executed is determined in the opening period, which is the period from the reception of the It is possible to transmit the opening command and the opening start command in the same transmission manner each time without changing the manner of transmitting the opening command and the opening start command. Therefore, it is possible to omit the control necessary for changing the transmission mode in which the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode, and reduce the processing load of the main controller 60. can be reduced. Moreover, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced. Further, according to the third modification, the main controller 60 sends commands of various contents to the sound emission control device 90 in order to cause the sound emission control device 90 to execute various effects corresponding to the state of the support mode. The processing load on main controller 60 can be reduced compared to the configuration for transmission.

Furthermore, according to the present modification 3, the main controller 60 determines whether the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. Set the length of the to 10 seconds. That is, the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the release start command at the same interval even if the state of the support mode when winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is different. Therefore, according to the present modified example 3, it is possible to omit the control necessary for changing the interval at which the main controller 60 transmits the opening command and the opening start command according to the state of the support mode. The processing load of the control device 60 can be reduced. Also, since the program for executing the control can be deleted, the program capacity of the main ROM 63 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present modification 3, when the state of the support mode when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is the low-frequency support mode, the sound emission control device 90 performs the opening effect in the front part of the opening period. Executes, and executes a right-handed informing effect in the latter part of the opening period. When the state of the support mode at the time of winning the jackpot lottery is the high-frequency support mode, the opening performance is executed in the front part of the opening period, and the round performance is executed in the rear part of the opening period. Therefore, according to the present modified example 3, the performance of the same contents is executed in the front part of the opening period regardless of the state of the support mode of the main controller 60, and the main controller 60 in the latter part of the opening period. Since an effect with different content is executed according to the state of the support mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to how the content of the effect will change from the front part to the rear part of the opening period. . Further, according to the present modified example 3, in the latter part of the opening period, it is possible to execute an effect including content suitable for the state of the support mode of main controller 60 .

B7-4. Variant 4:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to sequentially execute two effects (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) when an opening command is received. A configuration may be adopted in which one or more effects are set to be executed sequentially. According to this configuration, the number of effects actually executed among the set three or more effects changes by changing the timing at which the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening start command. Therefore, by controlling and changing the timing at which the main controller 60 transmits the opening start command, the number of effects to be executed by the sound emission control device 90 can be changed.

B7-5. Variant 5:
In the above embodiment and each modification, the main controller 60 is configured to transmit the opening start command to the sound emission control device 90 with the start of the opening/closing processing period as a trigger. A configuration may be adopted in which an opening start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 when the opening/closing door 36b of the winning device 36 is actually opened.

B7-6. Modification 6:
In the above embodiment and each modified example, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are configured to execute the hitting right notification effect after the opening effect ends when executing the hitting right notification effect. Alternatively, the display of the opening effect and the output of the sound may be superimposed while the display of the right-hand hitting notification effect and the output of the sound are superimposed. For example, while continuing the display of the opening effect, a character such as "Right hit!"

B7-7. Variant 7:
In the above-described embodiment and modified example 1, the length of the opening period in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to the length of the opening period in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low-frequency support mode. Although it is configured to be shorter than the length, the length of the opening period in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode is set to the length of the opening period in the case of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode. It may be configured to be set to be shorter than the length of the period.

B7-8. Modification 8:
In the above embodiment and each modification, when receiving a plurality of commands from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 measures the reception intervals of the plurality of commands, and based on the measured reception intervals may be configured to determine the type of effect to be executed. According to such a configuration, main controller 60 does not have to transmit various commands corresponding to each effect, so the processing load on main controller 60 can be reduced.

B7-9. Modification 9:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the above modifications, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 receive a command to execute another effect during execution of the effect. may be terminated and an effect corresponding to the received command may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a plurality of irrelevant effects from being performed in duplicate, making it difficult for the player to recognize each effect.

B7-10. Modification 10:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, the configuration is such that the high-frequency support mode is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends. good too. Moreover, it is good also as a structure containing the jackpot classification which shifts to high frequency support mode after opening-and-closing execution mode is complete|finished, and the jackpot classification which does not shift to high frequency support mode.

B7-11. Modification 11:
The configurations of the above embodiment and each of the modifications can also be applied to other configurations in which commands are transmitted and received between two devices.

For example, the main control device 60 transmits a variation command (variation pattern command) including information on the variation time to the sound emission control device 90, and then transmits a confirmation command for stopping (confirming) the pattern. It can also be applied to a configuration that Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 that has received the command for variation is set to sequentially execute a plurality of effects such as a notice effect, a ready-to-win effect, and a super ready-to-win effect, and sequentially executes the plurality of effects. When a confirmation command is received during execution, the effect being executed may be terminated and the confirmation effect of stopping the symbol may be executed.

Also, for example, the main control device 60 transmits an open command indicating the start of a round (for example, the first round open command) to the sound emission control device 90, and then an open command indicating the start of the next round ( For example, it can be applied to a configuration that transmits a second round open command). Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 that has received the first round open command is set to execute the first round effect corresponding to the first round, and during execution of the first round effect, two When the round opening command is received, the first round effect being executed may be ended and the second round effect may be executed. Note that the first round effect, the second round effect, and the like are realized by the sound emission control device 90 sequentially executing a plurality of processes.

Further, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an effect command for instructing execution of a predetermined effect, and then the effect operation indicating that the effect operation button 24 is pressed by the player. It can also be applied to a configuration that transmits commands. Specifically, for example, the display control device 100 that has received the panel selection effect command generates a panel selection effect for selecting one panel from among a plurality of panels (for example, a effect in which a plurality of panels rotates, moves, or , effect of moving the frame of the panel) is set to be executed, and if a effect operation command is received while the panel selection effect is being executed, the panel selection effect being executed is terminated, and the plurality of panels It may be configured to execute an effect corresponding to a predetermined panel included in the . Note that the panel selection effect is realized by the display control device 100 sequentially executing a plurality of processes.

Also, for example, the main control device 60 transmits to the sound emission control device 90 a variation command (variation pattern command) including information on variation time and a type command including information on the result of the jackpot lottery. It can also be applied to configurations. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game round and the content of the effect to be executed in the opening period based on the interval at which the variation command and the type command are received. may be configured.

B7-12. Variant 12:
In the above embodiment, the reception interval of the opening command and the opening start command is different, so that the sound emission control device 90 may or may not execute the right-handed notification effect. Depending on the content of the information received, the sound emission control device 90 may or may not execute the right-handed informing effect.

C. Third embodiment:
C1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the game machine in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . Control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged on the back of the inner frame 13. FIG. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The decorative parts are composed of light-emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing performance effects by lighting or blinking at the time of a jackpot lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20 and has a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates (turns) the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button 25b for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation of , based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

A game ball shooting button 26 for the player to operate is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined shooting strength regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball is shot to the front surface of the game board with the same shooting intensity as when the operation handle 25 is rotated at its maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when a game ball is shot by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front and also to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball shooting button 26, the player can hit the ball to the right. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball shooting button 26 is operated, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball shooting button 26 to shoot the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball shooting button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the periphery of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front. may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball shooting button 26 only with the right hand.

65 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

66 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general prize winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning mechanism KH. As illustrated, the variable winning mechanism KH is a mechanism including a first variable winning device 57 and a second variable winning device 58 . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

The general prize winning openings 32 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and are provided in plurality on the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided at the lower center of the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the first start hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second start port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second opening. It is possible to enter the ball into the starting port 34 . In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The first variable prize winning device 57 includes a first big prize winning port 57a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and a first opening/closing door 57b for opening and closing the first big prize winning port 57a. The first opening/closing door 57b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the first big winning hole 57a. When a big win is won in a big win lottery, which will be described later, the first opening/closing door 57b is opened, and a game ball can enter the first big winning hole 57a.

The second variable prize winning device 58 includes a second big prize winning port 58a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and a second opening/closing door 58b that opens and closes the second big prize winning port 58a. The second opening/closing door 58b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second big winning opening 58a. When the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the second open/close door 58b is opened, and a game ball can enter the second jackpot 58a.

The second big winning opening 58a of the second variable winning device 58 has a V winning area FV and a non-V winning area FNV. The V winning area FV and the non-V winning area FNV will be described later.

The second variable winning device 58 is arranged downstream of the first variable winning device 57 . The game ball reaching the first variable winning device 57 at the timing when the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is closed reaches the second variable winning device 58 after passing over the first opening/closing door 57b. do. At this time, when the second open/close door 58b is in the open state, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 58a.

Hereinafter, the first variable winning device 57 and the second variable winning device 58 are also simply referred to as "variable winning devices". Also, the first big prize winning opening 57a and the second big winning prize opening 58a are simply called "big prize winning openings", and the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are also called simply "opening/closing doors".

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, the main controller 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or a small prize is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 is performed. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b shift to the opening/closing execution mode, a game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a and the second big winning hole 58a in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a predetermined condition is satisfied while transitioning to the possible open state, it transitions again to the closed state. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls. The number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout device 71 when the game balls enter the first big prize winning port 57a and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout device 71 when the game balls enter the second big prize winning port 58a A configuration in which the number of prize balls is different may be adopted.

In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 32, the first variable winning device 57, the second variable winning device 58, the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is also expressed as winning. .

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a big winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 . The first symbol display part 37a is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 is performed, and the segment display device displays corresponding to the lottery result. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the first symbol. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 33 is also referred to as the first start hole game round.

The second pattern display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern means a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on the big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 . The second symbol display part 37b is used as a display mode until a big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34 is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display device. , to perform a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display device to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 34 is also referred to as a second start hole game round.

Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is also called a second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the first starting port 33 are reserved.

The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls entered into the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The normal figure unit 38, when the electric accessary item open lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the first variable winning device 57 or the second variable winning device 58. It is a game in which the open state of the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b is continued until one of the conditions is satisfied. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may consist of various display devices capable of showing the draw in progress and the draw results, such as a CRT or dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . The configuration of the display device provided in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols in a variable display or a predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol in accordance with the variable display or predetermined display. is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variation display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won. It also performs effect display during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

67A and 67B are explanatory diagrams showing the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 67(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41 and corresponds to the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern displayed in the second pattern display portion 37b. It is a design. When the game round triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is executed, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, and when a game turn triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. A pattern for use is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns showing numerals 1 to 8 as patterns for liquid crystal. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 67(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 67(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row is cyclically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 67(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Here, the game cycle refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and the end of the stop display. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information obtained based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 . In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big win lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second In either one of the two-symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the pattern display device 41, for each game round, After the pattern row is variably displayed as the pattern for the first liquid crystal or the pattern for the second liquid crystal, the pattern row is stopped and displayed so as to correspond to the lottery result of the obtained special information. In addition, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit playing time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. there is

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of pending games based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. A reserved game round is a game round that has not been executed, and regarding special information acquired based on winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, variation for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It refers to a game round that has not started to be displayed. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the winning to the first start port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, it is possible to display suspension displays corresponding to four suspension game rounds in the first suspension display area Ds1. Also, the number of pending games that can be held based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second pending display area Ds2 can display pending displays corresponding to four pending game rounds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37 are displayed. The first synchronous display unit Sync1 that performs the display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special figure unit 37 Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing the stop display, the 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Further, when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the variable display, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display portion 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronization display. The part Sync2 performs lighting display.

In this embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the liquid crystal normal map display area NA, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. A configuration may be adopted in which the surface 41a does not display some or all of these displays.

C2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the main control board 61 is connected to a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 . The main control board 61 is supplied with stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58). ) and other various detection sensors provided at various entrances and through gates are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 .

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are the electric accessory drive section 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34, and the first controller that opens and closes the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57. The variable winning driving section 57c, the second variable winning driving section 58c for opening and closing the second door 58b of the second variable winning device 58, and the main display section 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the driving of the first variable winning driving section 57c and the second variable winning driving section 58c so that the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are opened and closed. to run. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. Display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61 . A winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result, for example. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of a game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60 to . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls.

A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. An operating handle 25 is also connected to the firing control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball shooting button 26 is connected to the shooting control device 80 . When the game ball shooting button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is shot to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100, based on the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, grasps the fluctuation time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed. , presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, content of ready-to-win presentation, and details of presentation to be executed while symbols for the first liquid crystal and patterns for the second liquid crystal are displayed in a variable display are grasped. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A ready-to-win random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is also provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the ball is stored in the reservation information storage area. It is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of the ball entering is the second in the reservation information storage area 64b. 2 are stored chronologically in the reservation area Rb.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is By doing so, it moves to the execution area AE of the judgment processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/fail table stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first start port 33. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in . Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display device that is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. . The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the big win lottery is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, and the second start port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reservation area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, it is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 67(b), the symbols are first stopped in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped in the symbol row Z3. A ready-to-win state is achieved by forming a ready-to-win line and performing variable display of symbols in the symbol row Z2 when the ready-to-win line is formed. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37 a and the second symbol display portion 37 b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 465 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d moves to the electric role product execution area 64e, the electric role product is opened in the electric role product execution area 64e. A lottery is made to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4=0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb is reserved. Also called information.

Next, the success/failure table will be described. The success/failure table is table data for collation with the big-hit random number counter C1 when a big-hit random number counter C1 is used to draw a big-hit lottery. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. A winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to when the jackpot lottery is held in the probability mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 checks with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 33. The success/failure table and the success/failure table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), a success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode), and a success/failure table for the second start port (low probability mode). The success/failure table for the probability mode) and the success/failure table for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. FIG.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success/failure table for the first start port. FIG. 70(a) shows the success/failure table for the first start opening (for low probability mode), and FIG. 70(b) shows the success/failure table for the first start opening (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 70(a), in the success/failure table for the first start port (for low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the first start port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the right/wrong table for the second start port. FIG. 71(a) shows the right/wrong table for the second start port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 71(b) shows the right/wrong table for the second start port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 71(a), in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. there is Of the values from 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values from 0 to 4 are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set in the success/failure table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot. It is Of the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. Thus, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big win in the big win lottery than the low probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the low-probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit/fail table for the high-probability mode. included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning the jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, although not adopted in the hit/fail table in the present embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "small win" is a trigger to shift to an opening/closing execution mode in which opening and closing of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) is executed, but both the lottery mode and the support mode This is a right or wrong result that does not trigger the transition. On the other hand, "miss" is a pass/fail result that does not trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, nor does it trigger the transition to the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Opening and closing times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing door of the variable winning device in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device in the above-mentioned (2) opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 ( Hereinafter, a plurality of types of opening/closing patterns may be provided, and one type of opening/closing pattern may be set corresponding to each type of jackpot. In this embodiment, one type of opening/closing pattern is set corresponding to each type of jackpot, and the opening/closing mode of the first opening/closing door 57b and the opening/closing mode of the second opening/closing door 58b are set for each opening/closing pattern. different. The opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in this embodiment will be described later.

In addition, as an aspect of opening and closing control of the variable winning device in the opening and closing execution mode, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the occurrence frequency of game balls entering (winning a prize) is relatively high or low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode is set to continue until 5 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening and closing door 36b reaches 7. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds pass or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 7. can be done.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening and closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second 2 variable winning device 58), if the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing doors (first opening and closing door 57b, second opening and closing door 58b) The open mode is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time per opening or a larger opening limit number per opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening and closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which no prize is won. In addition, in this embodiment, the low-frequency winning mode is not provided, and the high-frequency winning mode is set for all jackpots.

In this embodiment, when a big win is obtained as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the allocation table. FIG. 72(a) shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 72(b) shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 72(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, An 8R first-class jackpot and an 8R second-class jackpot are set. In this embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" correspond to the 8R first type jackpot, and "28 to 39" correspond to the 8R second type jackpot. is set to

The 8R type 1 jackpot is eight times (8 Round), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, during the opening and closing execution mode, the 8R type 1 jackpot is controlled by variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the device 58) is performed. Then, when the game ball enters the V prize area FV, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

In this embodiment, in the 8R type 1 jackpot, the number of openings of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 in the opening/closing execution mode and the opening of the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 The total number of times is 8 times (8 rounds), that is, either the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b is opened once during one round. A mode in which the opening/closing door (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) is opened multiple times during one round may be employed. In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is controlled by decrementing a numerical value set in a round counter area (to be described later) by 1 each time one round is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, either the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b is controlled to open once before the numerical value set in the round counter area is decremented once. . As another aspect, the opening/closing door (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) may be opened multiple times before the numerical value set in the round counter area is decremented once.

The 8R type 2 jackpot is eight times (8 Round), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, during the opening and closing execution mode, the 8R type 2 jackpot is controlled by the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) so that the game ball does not easily enter the V winning area FV of the big winning hole 58a. ) (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b). However, if a game ball enters the V winning area FV, the lottery mode of the big win lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

Thus, in the first type jackpot, game balls are more likely to enter the V prize area FV during the round game than in the second type jackpot, so the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode is high. Probability of stochastic mode is high. On the other hand, in the type 2 jackpot, game balls are less likely to enter the V prize area FV during the round game compared to the type 1 jackpot, so the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode is the high probability mode. is unlikely to occur.

As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 72(b), the distribution table for the second start port includes, as jackpot types based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 34, A 16R first-class jackpot and an 8R second-class jackpot are set. In this embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" correspond to the 16R first type jackpot, and "27 to 39" correspond to the 8R second type jackpot. is set to

In the 16R first type jackpot, the total number of openings of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the number of openings of the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 Round), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, during the opening and closing execution mode, the 16R type 1 jackpot is controlled by variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the device 58) is performed. Then, when the game ball enters the V prize area FV, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

As described above, the 8R type 2 jackpot is the sum of the number of times the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 is opened and the number of openings of the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 in the opening/closing execution mode. is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, during the opening and closing execution mode, the 8R type 2 jackpot is controlled by variable winning devices (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the device 58) is performed. However, if a game ball enters the V winning area FV, the lottery mode of the big win lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot type when the jackpot hits. It is different from the case of winning a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Determine the display mode. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar mode to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning an electric role open lottery using the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open lottery in the electric accessory open lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer than that in the low-frequency support mode when the electric accessory 34a is elected.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the electric role is won, after one open state is completed, the next The closing time until the open state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric accessory open lottery to the next electric accessory open lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists establishment of special information acquisition conditions.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success/failure table (success/failure table for electric accessary product open lottery) used when executing an electric accessary product open lottery.

FIG. 73(a) shows a success/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 73( a ), the electric accessory open lottery success/failure table (for low frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 for the electric accessory open counter C4 that will win the electric role open winning. A value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 to be out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric accessary item open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 73(b) shows a success/failure table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory open lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 73(b), in the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery (for high frequency support mode), there are 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory open counter C4 for the electric accessory open winning. A value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 that is out. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric accessory open lottery is executed, the electric role open lottery is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is made in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the success/failure table for the electric accessory open lottery is set so that the high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second start port 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

C3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH. As described above, the variable winning mechanism KH has the first variable winning device 57 and the second variable winning device 58 . FIG. 74(a) shows a perspective view of the variable winning mechanism KH when the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are closed. For convenience of explanation, as shown in the figure, the point where the game ball launched to the right side of the game board 30 first reaches the variable winning mechanism KH is called a reference point P0, and a plane on the variable winning mechanism KH including the reference point P0 is called a plane portion SF.

A plane including the first opening/closing door 57b, the second opening/closing door 58b, and the plane portion SF is inclined downward from the right side of the game board 30 toward the center. A game ball shot rightward from the game board 30 from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 flows down the right side of the game board 30 and reaches the reference point P0 of the plane portion SF. When the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are closed, the game ball that reaches the reference point P0 flows down in the order of the reference point P0→the first opening/closing door 57b→the second opening/closing door 58b. As shown in the figure, for convenience of explanation, the direction in which the game ball flows down from the reference point P0 is defined as the X direction. As illustrated, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the closed first opening/closing door 57b in the X direction in about 0.4 seconds.

Six columnar projections 59 are arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. The projection 59 is arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b such that its longitudinal direction is substantially perpendicular to the X direction. The convex portion 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b adjusts the speed of the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Adjust the time required to pass through the upper surface of 58b (passage time).

Two protrusions 59 are arranged in a region corresponding to the non-V winning region FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Further, four convex portions 59 are arranged in a region corresponding to the V winning region FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. By arranging the convex portion 59 in this way, the game ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second open/close door 58b in the closed state in about 2 seconds. It passes through the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 58b in about 4 seconds.

FIG. 74(b) shows the variable winning mechanism KH when the first door 57b is open. FIG. 74(c) shows the variable winning mechanism KH when the second door 58b is open. While the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b transition between the open state and the closed state according to a predetermined opening/closing pattern. It should be noted that the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are not opened at the same time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed. 74(a), the state shown in FIG. 74(b), or the state shown in FIG. 74(c). That is, the case where the first door 57b is opened and the case where the second door 58b is opened are mutually exclusive.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a. FIG. 75(a) shows a game ball GB1 circulating on the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens, and a game ball GB1 flowing upstream from the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens. Circulating game balls GB2 are shown.

FIG. 75(b) shows the state immediately after the first opening/closing door 57b is opened. When the first opening/closing door 57b is opened, the game ball GB1 that has been circulating on the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b immediately before opening the first opening/closing door 57b enters the first big winning hole 57a. After that, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the game ball GB2 that had been circulating upstream from the first opening/closing door 57b immediately before the opening of the first opening/closing door 57b flows down and enters the first big winning hole 57a. do.

Thus, a game ball circulating on the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens, and a game ball circulating upstream from the first opening/closing door 57b just before the first opening/closing door 57b opens , the ball enters the first big winning hole 57a after the first opening/closing door 57b is opened.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a. FIG. 76(a) shows a game ball GB3 circulating in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b opens, and the second opening/closing door 58b opens. A game ball GB4 circulating upstream from the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before is shown.

FIG. 76(b) shows the state immediately after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened. When the second opening/closing door 58b is opened, the game ball GB3 that has been circulating in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening the second opening/closing door 58b is the second big winning hole 58a. The ball enters the non-V winning area FNV. After that, as shown in FIG. 76(c), just before the second opening/closing door 58b opens, the game ball GB4 that has been circulating upstream from the second opening/closing door 58b flows down, and the non-V ball of the second big winning opening 58a The ball enters the winning area FNV.

In this way, just before the second opening and closing door 58b opens, the game balls circulating in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b and the second A game ball circulating upstream from the opening/closing door 58b enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case where a game ball enters the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. FIG. 77(a) shows a game ball GB5 circulating in the area corresponding to the V prize area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the second opening/closing door 58b opens, and the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening. shows a game ball GB6 that circulates in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b.

FIG. 77(b) shows the state immediately after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened. When the second opening/closing door 58b is opened, the game ball GB5 that has been circulating in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening the second opening/closing door 58b is the second big winning hole 58a. The ball enters the V winning area FV. On the other hand, the game ball GB6 that had been circulating in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening the second opening/closing door 58b entered the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a. Enter the ball and do not enter the V winning area FV.

In this way, the game ball circulating in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before opening the second opening/closing door 58b is the second big winning after the second opening/closing door 58b is opened. The ball enters the V winning area FV of the mouth 58a, but the game ball that circulates in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b immediately before the opening of the second opening/closing door 58b After the opening/closing door 58b is opened, the ball does not enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot, and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. be. The lower part of FIG. 78 shows a time chart representing the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b, and the upper part of FIG. 78 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. rice field. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 78 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 78 indicates time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 78, in the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot, the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 57b is executed once as the first round of the round game. After that, the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 58b is performed until the number of rounds of the big win is reached. For example, in the case of the 8R type 1 jackpot, the opening and closing of the first opening and closing door 57b is performed once as the first round, and the opening and closing operation of the second opening and closing door 58b is performed seven times as the second to eighth rounds. be. In addition, in the case of the 16R type 1 jackpot, after the opening and closing operation of the first opening and closing door 57b is performed once in the first round, the opening and closing operation of the second opening and closing door 58b is performed 15 times in the 2nd to 16th rounds. be done. For convenience of illustration, FIG. 79 shows the opening and closing operations of the second opening/closing door 58b up to the fourth time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot and the second type jackpot, the opening and closing doors (first opening and closing door 57b, second opening and closing door 58b) shift from the open state to the closed state. The conditions for closing (hereinafter also referred to as "closing conditions") are as follows.
・When 7 game balls enter the big winning slot corresponding to the open/closed door ・10 seconds have passed with the opened/closed door open The opening/closing door (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Furthermore, the opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 57, second variable winning device 58) is performed in addition to the above-described closing conditions. is controlled by an open scenario, which is a program in which the conditions for transitioning to the open state are recorded. The opening scenario is prepared for each type of jackpot, and in this embodiment, there are three programs: a 16R first-class jackpot opening scenario, an 8R first-class jackpot opening scenario, and an 8R second-class jackpot opening scenario. are provided. In addition, for each opening scenario prepared for each type of jackpot, the time required for the opening/closing door to shift from the closed state to the open state, and the opening/closing door to be opened (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) is recorded for each round in the open/close execution mode. For example, in the opening and closing execution mode in the 8R type 1 jackpot, the first opening and closing door 57b shifts from the open state to the closed state to end the first round, and then the second opening and closing door 58b is in the open state as the second round. However, the time from when the first opening/closing door 57b shifts to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b shifts to the open state is set to the 8R first class jackpot open scenario.

When a big win is won in a big win lottery, the main side CPU 62 reads an opening scenario corresponding to the type of the big win, and whether or not to open the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b according to the read opening scenario. make a judgment as to whether In this way, the main CPU 62 executes opening/closing control of the opening/closing door based on the closing conditions and the opening scenario.

As described above, when the first type jackpot is won, the variable winning device (first variable winning The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the device 57 and the second variable winning device 58) is performed. In this embodiment, by controlling the timing of shifting the opening/closing door to the open state based on the opening scenario, game balls are made to easily enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a.

Specifically, the period from the closing of the second opening/closing door 58b to the next opening of the second opening/closing door 58b (hereinafter also referred to as “second opening/closing door closed period CLT”) is The time required for the game ball to pass through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface (2 seconds in this embodiment) or more, and the entire upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b (area corresponding to the V winning area FV and By setting less than the time (6 seconds in this embodiment) until the game ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV, during the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot , the game ball is controlled to easily enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning hole 58a. Hereinafter, the time until the game ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b is also referred to as "non-V winning area passage time NVT". Further, the time until the game ball passes through the entire upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b is also called "entire passage time ALT". That is, in the present embodiment, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot, the second opening/closing door closing period CLT is defined as non-V winning area passing time NVT≤second opening/closing door closing period CLT<full passage time ALT. By setting such that, the game ball is controlled to easily enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. The principle will be described below.

By setting the non-V winning area passage time NVT≦the second opening/closing door closing period CLT, the game ball that reaches the uppermost upstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed is It can pass through the area corresponding to the V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 58b and flow down to the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds reaches the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds, and the uppermost upstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. is passed at an interval of 0.6 seconds, by setting the non-V winning area passing time NVT≦second opening/closing door closing period CLT, after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed, the most upstream of the second opening/closing door 58b The game ball that reaches the part first is passed through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b, and distributed to the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. can be made In other words, at least one game ball exists in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b while the second opening/closing door 58b is closed. Therefore, by setting the second opening/closing door closing period CLT to a value equal to or longer than the non-V winning area passing time NVT and shifting the second opening/closing door 58b to the open state, the game ball can easily enter the V winning area FV. can do.

Further, by setting the second opening/closing door closing period CLT<full passage time ALT, the second opening/closing door 58b is opened before the game ball passes through the most downstream part of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. , the game ball can enter the V winning area FV. That is, after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed, the game ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the second opening/closing door 58b first can enter the second big winning hole 58a (V winning area FV). As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable prize winning mechanism KH is reached during the period from when the opening/closing door starts to open in the second round until the opening/closing door in the open state shifts to the closed state in the last round. It is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the out hole 43 by passing through the variable winning mechanism KH without entering either the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. . In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning mechanism KH is distributed during the period from the time when the opening/closing door starts to open in the second round until the opening/closing door in the open state shifts to the closed state in the last round. Almost all game balls to be played can enter the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. Therefore, when the player hits to the right during the round game corresponding to the first kind jackpot (8R first kind jackpot, 16R first kind jackpot), the game ball reaching the variable prize winning mechanism KH is almost never missed. A ball can be entered into the winning hole (first big winning hole 57a or second big winning hole 58a). Therefore, the player can efficiently obtain benefits (prize balls) during the round game.

In this embodiment, as the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT that satisfies the above conditions, the second opening/closing door closing period CLT=3 seconds is set in the open scenario. Also, the period from when the first door 57b opened in the first round shifts to the closed state until the second door 58b shifts to the open state is also set to 3 seconds according to the opening scenario. After the first open/close door 57b opened in the first round shifts to the closed state, the game ball that reaches the top surface of the first open/close door 57b first passes through the most downstream of the top surface of the second open/close door 58b. By shifting the second opening/closing door 58b to the open state, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b from the end of the first round to the start of the second round also enters the second big winning hole 58a. can be made As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning mechanism KH is distributed during the period from the opening of the opening/closing door in the first round until the opening/closing door in the open state shifts to the closed state in the last round. Almost all game balls can enter the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the period from when the first opening/closing door 57b opened in the first round transitions to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b transitions to the open state is the opening scenario. is set to 3 seconds by

In addition, the reason for opening the first opening and closing door 57b in the first round of the round game in the type 1 jackpot is the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door in the opening and closing execution mode of the type 2 jackpot described later, and the type 1 jackpot described above. This is to make the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door similar to that in the opening/closing execution mode of (1) and make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first-class jackpot and the second-class jackpot from the behavior of the opening/closing door. The reason for opening the first opening/closing door 57b in the first round of the round game in the second type jackpot will be described later.

Next, the behavior of the game ball when the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode of the first type jackpot is executed will be described. As described above, the upper portion of FIG. 78 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball when the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode for the first type jackpot is executed. The vertical axis of the graph indicates the distance in the X direction with the reference point P0 (see FIG. 74(a)) of the variable winning mechanism KH as the origin. The vertical axis represents the area corresponding to the first big prize winning opening 57a (upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b) and the area corresponding to the second big winning opening 58a (upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b) in the X direction. Indicated.

As mentioned above, the horizontal axis of the graph is time (seconds). A solid line and a broken line shown in the graph indicate the behavior of one game ball. That is, the solid line and broken line show the behavior of the game ball flowing down in the X direction from the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH over time. The graph shown in this description shows that the game ball fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds reaches the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds, and the variable winning mechanism KH The behavior of the game ball when it circulates in the X direction is shown.

The thick solid-line rectangular area shown in the graph corresponds to the open state of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b for the first type jackpot. 1 shows an area (hereinafter, also referred to as an open area) that is open. When the solid line indicating the behavior of the game ball overlaps the open area, the game ball has entered the big winning hole (first big winning hole 57a or second big winning hole 58a) corresponding to the open area. indicates A dashed line indicating the behavior of the game ball indicates the behavior of the game ball in the X direction when the game ball does not enter the big winning hole.

In addition, the point "·" shown at the intersection of the solid line indicating the behavior of the game ball and the open area indicates that the game ball enters the big winning hole (first big winning hole 57a or second big winning hole 58a). showing. That is, the number of points "·" in contact with one open area is increased by opening and closing the opening/closing door (first opening/closing door 57b or second opening/closing door 58b) corresponding to the open area. Or, it is the number of game balls entered into the second big winning hole 58a). As described above, in the present embodiment, as the closing condition, the opening/closing door is shifted from the open state to the closed state when seven game balls enter the big winning opening corresponding to the opening/closing door in the open state. Therefore, the open area corresponding to one opening of the first opening/closing door 57b and the open area corresponding to one opening of the second opening/closing door 58b are each in contact with seven points "·".

In addition, among the points "·" contacting each open area, the points "•" contacting the vertical side of the rectangle indicating the open area already flow through the upper surface of the open door before the opening/closing door is opened. Simultaneously with the opening of the opening/closing door, it indicates that the ball entered the big winning opening (or winning area) corresponding to the opening/closing door. That is, it corresponds to the behavior of the game ball GB1 shown in FIG. 75, the game ball GB3 shown in FIG. 76, the game ball GB5 and the game ball GB6 shown in FIG.

On the other hand, among the points "·" contacting each open area, the points "•" contacting the horizontal side of the rectangle indicating the open area flow upstream from each open/close door before the open/close door is opened. After opening the opening/closing door, it indicates that the big winning opening (or winning area) corresponding to the opening/closing door has been reached and the ball has entered the big winning opening (or winning area). That is, it corresponds to the behavior of the game ball GB2 shown in FIG. 75 and the behavior of the game ball GB4 shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, in the open scenario for the first-class jackpot (16R first-class jackpot, 8R first-class jackpot), the closing period CLT of the second open/close door is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, the above-mentioned condition of "non-V winning area passing time NVT (2 seconds) ≤ second open/close door closing period CLT (3 seconds)" is satisfied. Therefore, as can be seen from the graph, at least one game ball enters the V winning area FV area of the second big winning opening 58a in each round after the second round.

In addition, the above-described condition of "second opening/closing door closing period CLT (3 seconds)<entire passage time ALT (6 seconds)" is satisfied. Therefore, for convenience of illustration, only up to the fifth round can be shown, but after the start of the second round, almost all game balls circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH are either the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. It can be seen that the ball is entering the ball.

In this embodiment, in the opening scenario for the first type jackpot (for 16R type 1 jackpot, 8R type 1 jackpot), the second opening and closing door closing period CLT was set to 3 seconds, but the second opening and closing door closed By further increasing the value of the period CLT, in each round after the second round, more game balls can be controlled to enter the V winning area FV area of the second big winning opening 58a. For example, a value such as 4 seconds or 5 seconds can be set as the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT that satisfies the non-V winning area passing time NVT≦second opening/closing door closing period CLT<full passage time ALT. .

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second type jackpot, and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. be. The lower part of FIG. 79 shows a time chart representing the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b, and the upper part of FIG. 79 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. rice field. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 79 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 79 indicates time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 79 , the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the type 2 jackpot is the same as the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the above-described type 1 jackpot. As a second, the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 57b is performed once. After that, the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 58b is performed until the number of rounds of the big win is reached.

In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second type jackpot, a closing condition that is a condition for shifting from the open state to the closed state of the opening and closing doors (first opening and closing door 57b, second opening and closing door 58b) is applied. . In addition, as an opening scenario, an opening scenario for 8R second type jackpot is applied.

As described above, during the opening and closing execution mode, the second type jackpot is controlled by the variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 57, the second The opening/closing control of the opening/closing doors (the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b) of the variable winning device 58) is performed. In this embodiment, by controlling the timing of shifting the opening/closing door to the open state based on the opening scenario, it is made difficult for game balls to enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a.

First, the opening/closing control of the second opening/closing door 58b in the second and subsequent rounds will be described. After the second round, while opening and closing the second opening and closing door 58b multiple times, in order to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a, the closing period CLT of the second opening and closing door <non- It is set to V winning area passing time NVT. With this setting, after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed, the game ball that has reached the uppermost upstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b is an area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. , the second opening/closing door 58b opens. Furthermore, after the second opening/closing door 58b is closed, the game ball that reaches the most upstream portion of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b enters the non-V winning area FNV. During the period in which the second opening/closing door 58b is open, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b enters the non-V winning area FNV. Then, when the second opening and closing door 58b is closed again, the game ball that has reached the most upstream part of the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b moves the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b. However, since the second opening/closing door 58b opens before the game ball passes through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV, the game ball enters the non-V winning area FNV. Therefore, after the second round, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV by setting the second opening/closing door closing period CLT<non-V winning area passing time NVT. In this embodiment, as the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT that satisfies the above conditions, the second opening/closing door closing period CLT=1.8 seconds is set in the open scenario.

Next, the reason for opening the first opening/closing door 57b in the first round will be described. As described above, in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, while opening and closing the second opening and closing door 58b a plurality of times, control is performed so that game balls are less likely to enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. do. At this time, if the player hits right before the opening/closing execution mode is started, if the second opening/closing door 58b is opened from the first round, the opening of the second opening/closing door 58b in the first round At the time of opening, there is a possibility that a game ball exists in the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b. The ball enters the winning area FV. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, when the second opening/closing door 58b is first opened, a state in which no game balls are present in the V prize area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b is ensured. Therefore, the first opening/closing door 57b is opened in the first round.

After the first opening and closing door 57b moves to the closed state, the game ball that reaches the most upstream part of the upper surface of the first opening and closing door 57b passes through the upper surface of the first opening and closing door 57b, and the second opening and closing door 58b By opening the second opening and closing door 58b as the second round before passing through the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the game ball to the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a You can enter the ball. That is, the time from the transition of the first opening/closing door 57b to the closed state to the transition of the second opening/closing door 58b to the open state in the second round is the most upstream portion of the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b. In a time shorter than the time (less than 2.6 seconds in the present embodiment) required for the reached game ball to enter the most downstream portion of the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening and closing door 58b There must be

Also, before opening the first opening/closing door 57b in the first round, the game ball that passed the most downstream of the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b (for example, before opening the first opening/closing door 57b in the first round, the game ball A game ball circulating at the position of the game ball GB4 shown in (a)) is an area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b at the time when the first round ends and the second round starts. is distributed, if the second opening/closing door 58b is opened in the second round, the game ball enters the V winning area FV. Therefore, the time from when the first opening and closing door 57b is moved to the open state as the first round to when the second opening and closing door 58b is moved to the open state as the second round is the game ball It is required that the time (6.2 seconds or more in this embodiment) is longer than the time required for the water to flow through the most downstream of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b.

In this embodiment, the period from when the first opening/closing door 57b opened in the first round shifts to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b opens in the second round is 2.5 seconds in the open scenario. have set. With this setting, the time from when the first door 57b is closed to when the second door 58b is opened in the second round is 2.5 seconds. It takes less time (less than 2.6 seconds in this embodiment) than the time required to pass the upper surface of 57b. In addition, the time from shifting the first opening and closing door 57b to the open state as the first round to shifting the second opening and closing door 58b to the open state as the second round is 6.2 seconds or more, and the game ball is the second. This time is longer than the time required to flow through the most downstream of the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b and pass through the most downstream of the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, when the second opening/closing door 58b is first opened, there is no game ball in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. can be ensured.

Next, the behavior of the game ball when the opening/closing pattern in the second type jackpot opening/closing execution mode is executed will be described. As described above, the upper portion of FIG. 79 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball when the opening/closing pattern in the opening/closing execution mode for the second type jackpot is executed. Similar to FIG. 78, the graph shown in this description shows that the game balls fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds reach the reference point P0 of the variable winning mechanism KH every 0.6 seconds. , the behavior of the game ball when flowing through the variable winning mechanism KH in the X direction.

In the present embodiment, in the open scenario for the second type jackpot (for the 8R second type jackpot), the closing period CLT of the second opening/closing door is set to 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the above-described condition of "second opening/closing door closing period CLT (1.8 seconds)<non-V winning area passage time NVT (2 seconds)" is satisfied. Therefore, as can be seen from the graph, even though the second opening/closing door 58b is opened and closed multiple times after the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball enters the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. not. Also, for convenience of illustration, only up to the fifth round can be shown, but after the start of the first round, almost all game balls circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH are either the first big winning hole 57a or the second big winning hole 58a. It can be seen that the ball is entering the ball.

In the present embodiment, the second opening/closing door closing period CLT is set to 1.8 seconds in the second type jackpot opening scenario, but the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT in the second type jackpot is Since it suffices if the second opening/closing door closing period CLT<non-V winning area passing time NVT, the value of the second opening/closing door closed period CLT can be further shortened. The outline of the processing by the gaming machine has been described above.

C4. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main controller 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S30101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and detection information (winning detection information) is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S30102.

In step S30102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30103.

In step S30103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessary product open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S30104. Note that the fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 86) described later.

In step S30104, a prize winning process for the starting opening associated with the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the prize winning process for the start opening in step S30104 will be described later. After executing step S30104, the process advances to step S30105.

In step S30105, winning processing for through accompanying winning to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through winning process in step S30105 will be described later. After executing step S30105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
Next, the prize winning process for the start opening will be described. Winning processing for the starting port is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 80: S30104).

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the winning process for the starting gate. In step S30201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (start winning). In step S30201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S30201: YES), the process proceeds to step S30202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S30203.

In step S30203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won the first starting hole 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30204.

In step S30204, the start suspension number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start suspension number RaN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the first reservation area Ra, is read, and the first start suspension number RaN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the winning to the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30209.

In step S30201, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start hole 33 (S30201: NO), the process proceeds to step S30205, and whether or not the game ball has won the second start hole 34 is determined. 2 It is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34 .

In step S30205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S30205: YES), the process proceeds to step S30206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S30207. On the other hand, in step S30205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 34 (S30205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole ends.

In step S30207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30208.

In step S30208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start suspension number RbN), which is the value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second reservation area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as a target for processing. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending starts based on winnings to the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30209.

In step S30209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S30204 or step S30208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S30209, if the start suspension number N is not less than the upper limit (S30209: NO), the winning process for this start opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S30209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S30209: YES), the process proceeds to step S30210, adds 1 to the number N of start suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then proceeds to step S30211. , adds 1 to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S30212.

In step S30212, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S30103 (Fig. 80), the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and each value of the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (Fig. 86), It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations incremented by 1 in step S30210. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S30210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter updated in step S30103 (FIG. 80) Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S30210. After executing step S30212, the process proceeds to step S30213.

In step S30213, a first determination process is executed. The first determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (holding information). type, presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, variation time of the game round, etc. are executed before the reservation information becomes a target of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60. The details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S30213, the process proceeds to step S30214.

In step S30214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (first determination information ) as a pending command.

The hold command is a judgment result (first judgment information) based on the holding information acquired based on the occurrence of the winning to the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 and the holding information. This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm the information before the information becomes the object of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60 . The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process ( FIG. 86 : step S30703) of the normal process, which will be described later.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is increased. to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved items. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second start port 34, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

After executing step S30214, the main MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the start opening.

<First determination process>
Next, the preceding determination processing will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: S30213) of the winning process for the starter.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the first determination process. As described above, the first determination process, based on the reservation information, determines whether the jackpot lottery is successful, determines the type of jackpot, determines whether reach occurs, determines the variation time of the game round, etc. The reservation information is the main This is a process to be executed before becoming a target of the jackpot lottery by the control device 60 .

In step S30301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of judging whether or not a jackpot lottery is successful, judging the type of jackpot, and judging whether or not a reach has occurred. The details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S30301, the process proceeds to step S30302.

In step S30302, fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining the variation time of game rounds. Details of the fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step S30302, the current destination determination process ends.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition processing>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the ahead determination process (FIG. 82: S30301).

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S30401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning to the starting opening in the winning process for starting opening (FIG. 81) is read. After that, the process advances to step S30402 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this winning prize is executed as a game round. Specifically, the judgment result of the preceding judgment process executed by the winning prize before this winning prize is read from the corresponding storage area, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed before the jackpot lottery by this winning prize is read. By judging, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the winning of this time is executed as a game round is judged.

In step S30402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round, (S30402: YES), the process proceeds to step S30403, and the success/failure table storage area The success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S30405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S30402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to this winning prize is executed as a game round (S30402: NO), the process proceeds to step S30404, and for the high probability mode As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S30405, and as a result of referring to the success/failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S30405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S30405: YES), the process proceeds to step S30406, and is stored in the storage area due to the winning of the start gate this time. Read the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S30407 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is obtained based on the winning in the first start port 33, the distribution table for the first start port is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning of the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing step S30407, the process advances to step S30408.

In step S30408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the first jackpot. In step S30408, when it is determined that the game corresponds to the first type jackpot (S30408: YES), the process advances to step S30409 to store the first type jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30408 that the first type jackpot is not supported (S30408: NO), the process proceeds to step S30410 to store the second type jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated.

In step S30405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S30405: NO), the process proceeds to step S30411, and is stored in the storage area by winning the starting port this time. read out the value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, it progresses to step S30412 and refers to the table for reach determination memorize|stored in the table storage area 63c for reach determination. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S30413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S30413, when it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S30413: YES), the process advances to step S30414 to store reach occurrence information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. After that, the preceding determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30413 that the reach generation is not supported (S30413: NO), the first determination process is terminated.

<Variation time information acquisition processing>
Next, fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the preceding determination process (FIG. 82: S30302).

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation time information acquisition process. In step S30501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area is obtained by winning the starting opening in the winning process for starting opening (FIG. 81). After that, the process proceeds to step S30502.

In step S30502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big win is determined based on the lottery result of the big win lottery determined by the big win/reach information acquisition process.

In step S30503, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S30503, the process advances to step S30507.

In step S30507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the fluctuation time information acquisition process is terminated.

In step S30502, when it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S30502: NO), the process advances to step S30504 to determine whether reach occurs. If it is determined in step S30504 that reach occurs (S30504: YES), the process proceeds to step S30505.

In step S30505, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S30507 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In step S30504, if it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (step S30504: NO), the process proceeds to step S30506, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is stored. By referring to it, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. After that, the process advances to step S30507 to store the acquired variable time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set such that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the shorter the variable time. there is That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different. At the time of executing the variable time acquisition process as one process of the previous determination process, that is, at the time of acquiring the variable time of the pending game round that is the target of the previous determination process, the pending game that is the target of the process The pending number at the time the round is executed as a game round is unknown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is acquired when it is assumed that the first suspended start number RaN=0 (and the second suspended start number RbN=0). Therefore, the variable time acquired by the variable time acquisition process may have a different value from the actual variable time when the pending game round that is the target of the previous determination process is executed as a game round. In the present embodiment, the variation time acquired in the variation time acquisition process executed as one process of the previous determination process is also called "provisional variation time Th".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for the first type jackpot, the variable time table for the second type jackpot, the variable time table for the losing reach, and the variable time table for the complete losing may be set individually.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the prize winning process for through will be described. Winning processing for through is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 80: step S30105).

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing winning processing for through. In step S30601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S30601, if it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S30601: YES), proceed to step S30602, whether or not the accessory reserved number SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) determine whether Incidentally, the reserved accessory number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, in step S30601, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S30601: NO), the winning process for this through is terminated.

In step S30602, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the reserved role item number SN (S30602: YES), the process proceeds to step S30603, and 1 is added to the reserved role item number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S30604.

In step S30604, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step S30103 (FIG. 80) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the win-win process for through is ended.

On the other hand, in step S30602, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is not less than the upper limit (S30602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved role number SN is the upper limit, Winning processing for through is ended without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S30701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S30702.

In step S30702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process proceeds to step S30703.

In step S30703, output data such as the start-up command set in step S30702 and the command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previously executed normal processing are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as start-up commands, variation commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S30703, the process advances to step S30704.

In step S30704, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S30705.

In step S30705, the ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S30706. In step S30706, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S30706, the process advances to step S30707.

In step S30707, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S30708.

In step S30708, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S30709.

In step S30709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S30703). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S30709, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S30709: NO), in steps S30710 and S30711, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S30710, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Also, in step S30711, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing this time (S30709: YES), the process returns to step S30703, and each process from step S30703 to step S30708 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step S30703 to step S30708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 86: S30706).

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S30801, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON at the start of the opening/closing execution mode and turned OFF at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON in step S30801 (S30801: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game round control is performed without executing any of the processes after step S30802. End the process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has won a prize. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30801 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S30801: NO), the process proceeds to step S30802.

In step S30802, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is terminated.

In step S30802, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S30802: NO), the process proceeds to steps S30803 to S30806 for game round start processing. In step S30803, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, in step S30803, when it is determined that the total number of reserved coins CRN is "0" (S30803: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30803 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S30803: NO), the process proceeds to step S30804.

In step S30804, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S30805, variation start processing for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S30806.

In step S30806, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-games counter PNC. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode. After executing step S30806, this game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S30802 that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S30802: YES), processing for progressing game rounds in steps S30807 to S30811 is executed.

In step S30807, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game round has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to vary until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S30807, it is determined whether or not the variable time information value stored in the variable time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 90) described later. The value of this set variable time information is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

If it is determined in step S30807 that the variable time has not elapsed (S30807: NO), the process advances to step S30808 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display section for the current game round. After executing step S30808, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S30807 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S30807: YES), the flow advances to step S30809 to execute fluctuation end processing. The fluctuation end processing is to change the pattern display section so that the form of the pattern to be displayed in the pattern display section determined in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 89) to be described later is displayed in the pattern display section related to the current game round. display control. After executing step S30809, the process advances to step S30810.

In step S30810, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (16R first-class jackpot flag, 8R first-class jackpot flag, 8R second-class jackpot flag) is ON. In step S30810, when any jackpot flag is ON (S30810: YES), the process proceeds to step S30811.

In step S30811, the opening/closing execution flag is turned ON. After that, the game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S30810, if none of the jackpot flags is ON (S30810: NO), this game round control process is terminated without executing step S30811.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 87: S30804).

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S30901, it is determined whether or not the reservation area to be subjected to the data setting process is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the first stored hold information (hold information) is the first stored hold information (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 69). is stored in the reservation area prior to the reservation information), the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the first reservation information stored chronologically in the second reservation area Rb than the first reservation information stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S30901, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

When it is determined in step S30901 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S30901: YES), data setting processing for the first reservation area in steps S30902 to S30907 is executed. On the other hand, in step S30901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S30901: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S30908 to S30913 is executed.

In step S30902, after subtracting 1 from the first start-up reservation number RaN in the first reservation area Ra, the flow advances to step S30903 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S30904. In step S30904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S30905.

In step S30905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S30905, the process advances to step S30906.

In step S30906, when the second pattern display flag of the various big hit flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second pattern display portion flag is information for specifying which of the first pattern display portion 37a and the second pattern display portion 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S30907.

In step S30907, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first reservation area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first start port 33 A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S30907 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S30703 of the normal process (FIG. 86). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

In step S30901, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the second reservation area Rb (step S30901: NO), The process advances to step S30908.

In step S30908, 1 is subtracted from the second start reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S30909. In step S30909, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the flow advances to step S30910 to move the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S30911.

In step S30911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S30911, the process advances to step S30912.

In step S30912, when the second symbol display flag of the various big hit flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. After that, the process proceeds to step S30913.

In step S30913, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, A shift-time command including information indicating that the shift-time command is included is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S30913 is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S30703 of the normal process (FIG. 86). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 87: S30805).

FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S31001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various jackpot flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, it is turned OFF when the second type jackpot is won. In step S31001, when it determines with it being high probability mode (S31001:YES), it progresses to step S31002.

In step S31002, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, when the variation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as a jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in 70(b). In addition, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is ) matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in ). After that, the process proceeds to step S31004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S31001: NO), the process proceeds to step S31003.

In step S31003, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, when the variation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in 70(a). In addition, when the fluctuation start process is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE ) matches the value set as a big hit in the success/failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in ). After that, the process proceeds to step S31004.

In step S31004, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S31002 or step S31003 is a big hit. In step S31004, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit (S31004: YES), in steps S31005 to S31012, to set the game result in the case of a big hit and to set the stop result process.

In step S31005, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S31005, when it is determined that the second symbol display flag is not ON (S31005: NO), the process proceeds to step S31006 and refers to the distribution table for the first start port (see FIG. 72(a)). and make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 8R first-class jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R second-class jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S31005, if it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S31005: YES), the process proceeds to step S31007, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 72(b)) Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R first-class jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R second-class jackpot. After executing the process of step S31006 or step S31007. The process advances to step S31008.

In step S31008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 is the first type jackpot. In step S31008, when it is determined that the game result is the first type jackpot (S31008: YES), the process proceeds to step S31009.

In step S31009, stop result setting processing for the first type jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the first type jackpot means that either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round in which the first type jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in the state where the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 Information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S31009, the process advances to step S31010.

In step S31010, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S31006 or step S31007 is turned ON. Specifically, in the case of a 16R first class jackpot, the 16R first class jackpot flag is turned ON, and in the case of an 8R first class jackpot, the 8R first class jackpot flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S31016.

On the other hand, in step S31008, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 is not the first type jackpot (S31008: NO), that is, when the type of the distributed jackpot is the second type jackpot , the process proceeds to step S31011.

In step S31011, stop result setting processing for the second type jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the second type jackpot means that either the stop result is displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round in which the second kind jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in the state where the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S31006 or step S31007 Information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S31011, the process proceeds to step S31012.

In step S31012, the flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S31006 or step S31007 is turned ON. In this embodiment, the type of the second type jackpot is only the 8R second type jackpot, so the 8R second type jackpot flag is turned ON. When a plurality of second type jackpot types are set, the corresponding second type jackpot flag is turned ON. After that, the process proceeds to step S31016.

In step S31004, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S31002 or step S31003 is not jackpot winning (S31004: NO), the process proceeds to step S31013 to determine whether or not reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether or not they match.

In step S31013, when it is determined that reach occurs in the game round (S31013: YES), the process proceeds to step S31014.

In step S31014, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is a process for setting which stop result is to be displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round which is the stop result for reach. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S31014, the process advances to step S31016.

In step S31013, when it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (S31013: NO), the process proceeds to step S31015.

In step S31015, stop result setting processing for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of loss means that in the current game turn that results in a loss, the variation display is terminated in a state in which either the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained by referring to the stop result table for the time of failure in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S31015, the process advances to step S31016.

In step S31016, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game cycle in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of reach. is the processing of The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S31016, the process advances to step S31017.

In step S31017, it is determined whether or not the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. In step S31017, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S31017: NO), the process proceeds to step S31018 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the variable time set in step S31016.

On the other hand, in step S31017, when it is determined that the second pattern display flag is ON (S31017: YES), the process proceeds to step S31019 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the variable time set in step S31016. After executing step S31018 or step S31019, the process advances to step S31020.

In step S31020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. That is, in the type command, as information on the type of jackpot, information on 16R first-class jackpot, information on 8R first-class jackpot, information on 8R second-class jackpot, or information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and out result Contains information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S31018 to S31020 are sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S30703 in the normal process (FIG. 86). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S31020, the process proceeds to step S31021.

In step S31021, the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game cycle out of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the first symbol display portion 37a is specified as the symbol display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started, When the second pattern display portion flag is ON, the second pattern display portion 37b is specified as the pattern display portion corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S31021, this fluctuation start processing is terminated.

<Processing for setting fluctuation time>
Next, the processing for setting the variable time will be described. The variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variable start process (FIG. 89: S31016).

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the variable time. In step S31101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S31102.

In step S31102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (16R first class jackpot flag, 8R first class jackpot flag, 8R second class jackpot flag) of the RAM 64 is ON. is ON (S31102: YES), the process proceeds to step S31103.

In step S31103, the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the flow advances to step S31107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S31102, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not won (S31102: NO), the process proceeds to step S31104, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S31104) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won in the above step S31102, in the step S31104, reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach occurs (S31104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S31105. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S31105, the variation time table for reach occurrence stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the flow advances to step S31107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S31104, when it is determined that reach does not occur in this game round (S31104: NO), the process proceeds to step S31106, and the variable time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the variable time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. After that, the flow advances to step S31107 to set the acquired variable time information in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table indicates that the larger the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN, the greater the variable time. set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game round is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set so that the variable time becomes shorter as the values of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN are larger. In addition, for example, the larger the value of the total number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. Also, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of total pending numbers CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspension number RaN increases, and when the second start suspension number RbN is "1" or more may be set such that the larger the second start suspension number RbN, the shorter the variation time. Further, when the second start suspension number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start suspension number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time, or the variable time is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, less fluctuation time is selected so that reach does not occur A variable time table for use may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable time at the time of occurrence of reach, and the variable time that is easily selected and the variable time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the big win is won and when the reach is lost. good. Also, the variable time table for the first type jackpot, the variable time table for the second type jackpot, the variable time table for the losing reach, and the variable time table for the complete losing may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 86: S30707).

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step S31201, it is determined whether or not the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the big winning opening opening/closing process period (at the start of the ending period) in the opening/closing execution mode, and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

If it is determined in step S31201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S31201: NO), the flow advances to step S31202 to determine whether or not the opening/closing period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag indicates the period during which the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 57b of the first variable winning device 57 and the second opening/closing door 58b of the second variable winning device 58 is performed. is turned ON at the timing when the big winning opening opening/closing processing period is started, and is turned OFF at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b is completed.

If it is determined in step S31202 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (S31202: NO), the flow advances to step S31203 to determine whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S31203, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S31203: NO), the process proceeds to step S31204, timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b is completed. It is determined whether or not. In step S31204, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S31204: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S31204 that it is time to end the variable display (S31204: YES), the flow advances to step S31205 to determine whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S31205 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S31205: YES), the process proceeds to step S31205. On the other hand, in step S31205, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (S31205: NO), the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S31206, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step S31207.

In step S31207, an open scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, in the case of a 16R first-class jackpot, an open scenario for the 16R first-class jackpot is set, and in the case of an 8R first-class jackpot, an open scenario for the 8R first-class jackpot is set. If it is an 8R second-class jackpot, an opening scenario for the 8R second-class jackpot is set. After executing step S31207, the process advances to step S31208.

In step S31208, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step S31208, the process advances to step S31209.

In step S31209, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 at step S30703 in the normal process (FIG. 86). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode. A sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the opening time and the period of opening/closing processing of the big winning opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S31209, the process advances to step S31210 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31203 that the opening period flag is ON (S31203: YES), the process proceeds to step S31211.

In step S31211, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S31211 that the opening period has ended (S31211: YES), the process advances to step S31212 to turn off the opening period flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S31213.

In step S31213, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S31213, the process proceeds to step S31214.

In step S31214, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S31202, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S31202: YES), the process proceeds to step S31215 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. The special prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S31215, the process advances to step S31216.

In step S31216, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening/closing process has ended. If it is determined that the large winning opening opening/closing process has ended (S31216: YES), the process proceeds to step S31217. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S31216 that the large winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (S31216: NO), the large winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

In step S31217, the open/close processing period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S31218.

In step S31218, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. After executing step S31218, the process advances to step S31219.

In step S31219, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the length of time of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the ending time of the same constant length is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM64. After executing step S31219, the process proceeds to step S31220.

In step S31220, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in step S30603 in the normal processing (FIG. 86). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S31220, the process advances to step S31221.

In step S31221, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31201 that the ending period flag is ON (S31201: YES), the process proceeds to step S31222.

In step S31222, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S31219), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S31222 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S31222: YES), the process proceeds to step S31223.

In step S31223, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the flow advances to step S31224 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game rounds after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S31224, the process advances to step S31225 to turn off the opening/closing execution mode flag. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S31222, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S31222: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 91: S31215).

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S31301, it is determined whether or not the door is open. That is, it is determined whether or not the first opening/closing door 57b or the second opening/closing door 58b is open. If it is determined in step S31301 that the door is not open (S31301: NO), the process proceeds to step S31302.

In step S31302, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening scenario is satisfied. Specifically, in addition to counting the number of rounds to be executed, a timer counter counts whether the time to maintain the closed state of the opening and closing door in the round being executed has passed and the timing to open is reached. It is determined whether or not the conditions for shifting the doors (first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) to the open state are established. In step S31302, when it is determined that the opening condition of the opening scenario is not established (S31302: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31302 that the opening condition of the opening scenario is satisfied (S31302: YES), the process proceeds to step S31303.

In step S31303, the opening doors ((first opening/closing door 57b, second opening/closing door 58b) determined to satisfy the opening condition are opened. After executing step S31303, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S31301 that the opening/closing door is open (S31301: YES), the process proceeds to step S31304. In step S31304, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a has been detected. In step S31304, when the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a is detected (S31304: YES), the process proceeds to step S31305.

In step S31305, the V winning flag is turned ON. The V prize flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V prize area FV, and the lottery mode in the normal game round executed after the end of the round game is set to either a high probability mode or a low probability mode. It is used to determine whether to set to After executing step S31305, the process advances to step S31306.

In step S31306, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is sent to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 86: step S30703) of the normal process. The audio light emitting device that receives the V winning command executes settings for executing the V winning effect. The V winning effect is an effect for informing the player that the game ball has entered the V winning area FV. After executing step S31306, the process advances to step S31307. On the other hand, in step S31304, if the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a is not detected (S31304: NO), the process proceeds to step S31307 without executing steps S31305 and S31306. move on.

In step S31307, it is determined whether or not the closing condition is met. As described above, the closing condition is that either "seven game balls have been placed in the big winning opening corresponding to the opening/closing door in the open state" or "10 seconds have passed in the open state". That is. In step S31307, when it is determined that the closing condition is not established (S31307: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31307 that the closing condition is satisfied (S31307: YES), the process proceeds to step S31308.

In step S31308, the opening/closing door is shifted to the closed state. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 91: S31226).

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S31401, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

In step S31401, when it is determined that the V winning flag is ON (S31401: YES), the process proceeds to step S31402 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R first-class jackpot flag, 8R first-class jackpot flag, 8R second-class jackpot flag, and high-frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, maintain that state. Also, the V winning flag is turned OFF. After executing step S31402, the process advances to step S31403.

In step S31403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then the flow advances to step S31404 to turn the high-frequency support mode flag ON. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process advances to step S31405.

In step S31405, 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC indicates the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S31406.

In step S31406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, the process advances to step S31410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31401 that the V winning flag is not ON (S31401: NO), the process advances to step S31407 to execute flag erasing processing. Specifically, when the 16R first-class jackpot flag, 8R first-class jackpot flag, 8R first-class jackpot flag, 8R second-class jackpot flag, and high-frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, maintain that state. After that, the process proceeds to step S31408.

At step S31408, after the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON, the process advances to step S31409 to set 100 to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. Thereafter, the process advances to step S31410.

In step S31410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the transition processing at the end of the ending period ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 86: S30708).

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S31501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flags in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 are ON. The under-support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened, and is turned OFF when it is to be returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S31501 that the supported flag is not ON (S31501: NO), the process proceeds to step S31502.

In step S31502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the jackpot flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned ON when the electric accessary product open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessary product 34a is won in the open state, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. is. If it is determined in step S31502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S31502: NO), the process proceeds to step S31503.

In step S31503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S31503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31503: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31503: YES), the process proceeds to step S31504.

In step S31504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the general pattern unit 38 . If it is determined in step S31504 that it is time to end the variable display (S31504: YES), the process advances to step S31505 to set the off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S31504: NO), the process proceeds to step S31506.

In step S31506, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S31506, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S31506: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S31506 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S31506: YES), the process proceeds to step S31507.

In step S31507, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S31508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S31507 (S31507: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S31508 (S31508: YES), the process proceeds to step S31509 to perform the electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric role item opening lottery Winning (see FIG. 73(b)). Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S31510.

In step S31510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S31509 is support winning. In step S31510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S31510: YES), the process proceeds to step S31511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S31512. On the other hand, in step S31510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S31510: NO), the process proceeds to step S31512 without executing the processing of step S31511.

In step S31512, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S31512 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S31512: YES), the process proceeds to step S31513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31512 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S31512: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S31513, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S31513, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S31513: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31513 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S31514 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S31515.

In step S31515, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. set. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support mode command set in step S31515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process ( FIG. 86 : step S30703) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support mode command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S31507 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S31507: YES), or if it is determined in step S31518 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S31508: NO), the process proceeds to step S31516, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S31517.

In step S31517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S31516 is support winning. In step S31517, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S31517: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S31517, if it is determined that the support is won (S31517: YES), the process advances to step S31518 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" to the second round counter area RC2. , terminates the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S31502 that the support winning flag is ON (S31502: YES), the process advances to step S31519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S31519, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31519: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general-purpose unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31519: YES), the process proceeds to step S31520.

In step S31520, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S31521 to turn on the supporting flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S31501, when it is determined that the support flag is ON (S31501: YES), the process advances to step S31522 to execute an electric opening/closing control process for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing control process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 94: S31522).

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing control process. In step S31601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S31601: YES), the process proceeds to step S31602.

In step S31602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S31602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31602: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the present electric opening/closing control process is terminated.

In step S31602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31602: YES), the process proceeds to step S31603 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S31603, the process advances to step S31604.

In step S31604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S31605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S31605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S31605: NO), the electric opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S31605: YES), the process advances to step S31606 to turn off the supported flag. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

In step S31601, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S31601: NO), the process advances to step S31607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S31607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S31607: NO), the electrical opening/closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S31607: YES), the process advances to step S31608 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S31609.

In step S31609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S31609: NO), the process advances to step S31610 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S31610 that the high-frequency support mode is on (S31610: YES), the flow advances to step S31611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S31609 that the open/close execution mode is set (S31609: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S31610 (S31610: NO), the process proceeds to step S31612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electrical switching control process is terminated.
C5. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 96 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

C6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S31701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S31701, the process advances to step S31702.

In step S31702, command handling processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S31702, the process advances to step S31703.

In step S31703, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the command handling process of step S31702. After executing step S31703, the process advances to step S31704.

In step S31704, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S31702. After executing step S31704, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 97: S31702).

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step S31801, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main CPU 62 or not. The opening command is a command sent from the main side CPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 92 at the start of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode (FIG. 91: S31209) which is executed when the jackpot lottery is won. If it is determined in step S31801 that an opening command has been received from the main CPU 62 (S31801: YES), the process proceeds to step S31802.

In step S31802, it is set to execute the opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect. Specifically, the setting of light emission data of various lamps for the effect of opening and the notification of hitting to the right and the setting of sound output data are performed. The opening effect and the hitting to the right notification effect are effects executed during the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, as the opening effect, an effect for informing the player that the opening/closing execution mode has started is executed. In addition, as a right-handed notification effect, an effect of prompting the game ball to be shot to the right side of the game board 30 and an effect of prompting the game ball to enter the V winning area FV of the second big winning hole 58a are executed. do. After executing step S31802, the process advances to step S31703.

In step S31703, an opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the opening effect command, it sets image data for the opening effect and for informing of hitting to the right, and causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image based on the image data. After executing step S31803, the process advances to step S31804.

In step S31804, it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main CPU 62. The V winning command is a command sent from the main side CPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 92 when the game ball enters the V winning area FV during execution of the large winning opening opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S31804, the process advances to step S31805.

In step S31805, it is set to execute the V winning effect. Specifically, setting of light emission data of various lamps for V winning effects and setting of audio output data are performed. This is an effect for informing the player that the game ball has entered the V winning area FV. After executing step S31805, the process advances to step S31806.

In step S31806, a V winning effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. FIG. When receiving the V winning effect command, the display side MPU 102 sets image data for the V winning effect, and causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image based on the image data. After executing step S31806, the process advances to step S31807.

In step S31807, processing for responding to other commands received from the main CPU 62 is executed. After executing step S31807, this command handling process ends.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S31901, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process advances to step S31902.

In step S31902, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S32001, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S32101, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 100) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the performance command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S32101), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the pattern for the liquid crystal set by the sound emission control device 90, and generate the effect image corresponding to the state. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41 .

In step S32102, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S32101), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S32103.

In step S32103, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S32102), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S32104.

In step S32104, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S32103), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S32105, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, the second big prize winning opening 58a is configured so that the V winning area FV and the non-V winning area FNV are adjacent to each other, and the second big winning opening 58a is opened and closed by the second opening/closing door 58b. , V winning area FV and non-V winning area FNV can be controlled by opening and closing one opening/closing door (second big winning opening 58a).

In the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot, the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT is set such that the non-V winning area passing time NVT≦the second opening/closing door closing period CLT is satisfied. A game ball can enter the V winning area FV area of the winning opening 58a. Furthermore, by setting the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT so that the second opening/closing door closing period CLT < full passage time ALT, after the start of the second round, almost all A game ball can be entered into the second big winning hole 58a.

In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot, by setting the value of the second opening and closing door closing period CLT so that the second opening and closing door closing period CLT < non-V winning area passing time NVT It is possible to prevent game balls from entering the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a even though the second open/close door 58b is opened and closed multiple times.

In this way, by controlling the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT, it is possible to control the entry of game balls into the V winning area FV and the non-V winning area FNV.

Here, when compared with a general gaming machine, in the general gaming machine, in order to execute control for entering the game ball into the V winning area, a guide lever for guiding the game ball to the V winning area , and by controlling the operation of the guide lever, entry of the game ball into the V winning area is controlled. Therefore, it is necessary to control the operation of the guide lever separately from the control of the operation of the opening and closing door of the big prize opening, which complicates the control.

On the other hand, the game machine in this embodiment can control the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV by controlling the operation of the second opening/closing door 58b, so that the control can be simplified. As a result, since the control program can be simplified, the storage capacity for recording the program can also be reduced.

In addition, in the case of a general gaming machine having a large winning opening (V winning opening) having a large winning opening on the upstream side of the flow path and a V winning area FV on the downstream side, the game ball enters the V winning area FV. When executing the difficult opening/closing execution mode, in order to prevent game balls from entering the V winning area FV, the opening/closing door of the V winning opening is controlled so as not to transition to an open state (or at all). It is necessary to set the open state time to an extremely short time. In addition, it is necessary to provide a guide valve for controlling whether or not the game ball is allowed to enter the V winning area FV inside the V winning opening on the downstream side. In the case of such a game machine, the operation control for making the state transition between the open state and the closed state of the opening and closing door becomes complicated, and besides the operation control, it is necessary to control the operation of the induction valve described above. Therefore, the control becomes more complicated, and it is necessary to secure a storage area for storing the program for executing the control. Furthermore, when the opening/closing door of the V winning port is hardly (or not) changed to the open state, or when the open state time is extremely short, even from the player's point of view, the expectation of the opening execution mode is reduced. Resulting in.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a large winning opening (first large winning opening 57a) is provided on the upstream side of the flow path, and a large winning opening (second large winning opening 58a) having a V winning area FV is provided on the downstream side. Although it has a configuration similar to that of the above general gaming machine, in the case of the gaming machine of this embodiment, the non-V winning area FNV is provided on the upstream side of the V winning area FV. and V winning area FV to which the game ball is to enter can be realized by controlling the operation of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, as compared with the above-described general gaming machine, the control can be simplified, and the storage area required for storing the program for executing the operation control of the induction valve can be reduced. Further, even in the opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball is hard to enter the V winning area FV, the second opening/closing door 58b can be opened for a certain period of time. It can give a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a protrusion 59 as adjusting means for adjusting the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. Therefore, by adjusting the number of protrusions 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b, it is possible to adjust the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to control the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV, in the opening/closing execution mode in the type 1 jackpot, the non-V winning area passing time NVT≦second opening/closing It is necessary to perform control so as to satisfy the following conditions: door closing period CLT and second opening/closing door closing period CLT<full passage time ALT. By doing so, the non-V winning area passing time NVT and the overall passing time ALT can be adjusted. Therefore, in addition to adjusting the value of the second opening/closing door closing period CLT, it is also possible to adjust the number of protrusions 59 arranged on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. It is possible to widen the setting range of the value of the two opening/closing door closing period CLT.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first big prize opening 57a is provided on the upstream side of the second big prize opening 58a. Then, by opening the first opening/closing door 57b in the first round in the opening/closing execution mode, when the second opening/closing door 58b is first opened, a game ball is placed in the V prize area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. can ensure the absence of As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V prize area FV in spite of the open/close execution mode corresponding to the second type jackpot.

C7. Modifications The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible.

C7-1. Variant 1:
FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 1 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102(a), the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 1 includes a plate-like member MD1 above the second big winning opening 58a. Further, the variable winning mechanism KH is provided with a magnetic member MD2 on the distribution surface through which game balls flow and upstream of the second opening/closing door 58b.

Functions of the plate member MD1 and the magnetic member MD2 will be described with reference to FIG. 102(b). When the game ball reaches the upstream side of the second big winning opening 58a, the plate-like member MD1 is such that the second opening/closing door 58b is in an open state, and the game ball enters the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a. Despite being able to enter, the game ball progressing along the flow path floats from the flow path on the upstream side of the second big winning opening 58a for some reason, and enters the non-V winning area FNV. It has a function to suppress passing through without doing it. As shown in FIG. 102(b), even if the game ball floats from the flow path on the upstream side of the second big winning hole 58a, the game ball is made to collide with the plate-like member MD1, and the game is played. The course direction of the ball can be changed to the direction of the non-V winning area FNV, and the game ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the non-V winning area FNV without entering the non-V winning area FNV even though the ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a.

As the plate member MD1, a rubber material, a resin, a cushioning member having a cushioning property, or the like may be employed. Also, instead of the plate-like member MD1, a plurality of nails may be arranged at the position of the plate-like member MD1. Further, the shape of the plate-like member MD1 may be such that the surface that collides with the game ball may be corrugated, concave, or uneven.

As with the plate member MD1, the magnetic member MD2 has the second door 58b opened when the game ball reaches the upstream side of the second big prize opening 58a, and the game ball reaches the second big prize. Although the ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV of the opening 58a, the game ball advancing along the flow path floats from the flow path upstream of the second big winning opening 58a for some reason, It has a function to prevent the ball from passing through the non-V winning area FNV without entering. The magnetic member MD2 is a member made of a magnetic material, and draws the game ball toward the magnetic member MD2 by its magnetic force. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from floating from the flow path surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the non-V winning area FNV without entering the non-V winning area FNV even though the ball can enter the non-V winning area FNV of the second big winning opening 58a. .

Instead of the magnetic member MD2, a cushioning member such as resin or rubber may be arranged at the position of the magnetic member MD2 to cushion the impact between the game ball and the flow path. To reduce the force in the direction in which a game ball floats from a flow path by buffering the impact between the game ball and the flow path when a buffer member is arranged, thereby suppressing the game ball from floating from the flow path. can be done.

C7-2. Modification 2:
FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 2 of the third embodiment. In Modification 2, as shown in FIG. 103(a), the first big winning opening 57a and the second big winning opening 58a are provided on the side of the flow path through which the game balls flow. Also, the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are provided on the flow path surface of the flow path through which the game balls circulate. The first opening/closing door 57b includes a first ball entry preventing member 57d for preventing game balls from entering the first big winning opening 57a when the first opening/closing door 57b is in a closed state. In addition, the second opening/closing door 58b is provided with a second ball entry prevention member 58d for preventing the game ball from entering the second big winning opening 58a when the second opening/closing door 58b is in the closed state.

The first ball entry prevention member 57d has a function of narrowing the opening of the first big winning opening 57a to a size that prevents game balls from entering the opening when the first opening/closing door 57b is closed. In addition, the second ball entry prevention member 58d has a function of narrowing the opening of the second big prize opening 58a to a size that does not allow game balls to enter the opening when the second opening/closing door 58b is closed. .

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the first opening/closing door 57b is tilted in the direction of the first big prize winning opening 57a, thereby transitioning from the closed state to the open state. By tilting the first opening/closing door 57b in the direction of the first big winning opening 57a, the opening of the first big winning opening 57a becomes large enough for a game ball to enter. In addition, by tilting the first opening/closing door 57b in the direction of the first big winning hole 57a, the game balls flowing through the open first opening/closing door 57b are guided in the direction of the first big winning hole 57a, The ball enters the 1st prize-winning opening 57a.

Furthermore, the tilting of the first opening/closing door 57b causes a step D1 between the upper surface of the first opening/closing door 57b and the flow path surface, so that the game ball circulates through the first opening/closing door 57b at a relatively high speed. However, by impacting the step, it is possible to reduce the speed and guide it in the direction of the first big winning hole 57a, and as a result, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 57a in the open state. It is possible to suppress passing through without

As shown in FIG. 103(c), the second opening/closing door 58b transitions from the closed state to the open state by tilting in the direction of the second big prize winning opening 58a. By tilting the second opening/closing door 58b in the direction of the second big winning opening 58a, the opening of the second big winning opening 58a (non-V winning area FNV and V winning area FV) is opened for the game ball to enter. be large enough. In addition, by tilting the second opening/closing door 58b in the direction of the second large winning opening 58a, the game balls flowing through the second opening/closing door 58b in the open state are guided in the direction of the second large winning opening 58a. The ball enters the second prize-winning opening 58a.

Further, when the second opening/closing door 58b is tilted, the area between the area corresponding to the V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b and the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. The intervening wall member W is not inclined like the second opening/closing door 58b. It has the function of a wall that separates the area corresponding to the V prize area FV. Therefore, when the second opening/closing door 58b is inclined, even if the game ball circulates in the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the top surface of the second opening/closing door 58b at a relatively high speed, the wall member By impacting W, it is possible to reduce the speed and guide it in the direction of the non-V winning area FNV of the second large winning opening 58a, and as a result, the game ball does not enter the non-V winning area FNV. You can prevent it from passing through.

Further, when the second opening/closing door 58b is inclined, a step D2 is generated between the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the inclined second opening/closing door 58b and the flow path surface. Even a game ball that circulates in the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the open/close door 58b is impacted on the step D2 to reduce its speed and move in the direction of the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the V winning area FV without entering the ball.

Furthermore, the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 2 has a magnetic member on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b as an adjustment means for adjusting the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b. 59a are arranged. The magnetic member 59a decelerates the speed of the game ball by its magnetic force. can adjust the time required for the to pass through. In addition, the action of the magnetic force exerted on the game ball by the magnetic member 59a makes the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door 58b move peculiarly, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

C7-3. Variant 3:
The opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to the opening/closing pattern shown in the third embodiment, and various opening/closing patterns can be employed.

FIG. 104 shows an example of the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first type jackpot, and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern, as modification 3. It is an explanatory view explaining. The lower part of FIG. 104 shows a time chart showing the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b, and the upper part of FIG. 104 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. rice field. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 104 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 104 indicates time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

As illustrated, in the opening/closing pattern of Modification 3, the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b are alternately opened/closed. In the case of this opening/closing pattern, by controlling the time from when the first opening/closing door 57b shifts to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b opens, a game ball is placed in the V winning area FV of the second big winning opening 58a. It is possible to control whether or not to enter the ball. The time from when the first opening/closing door 57b shifts to the closed state to when the second opening/closing door 58b opens can be set in the opening scenario.

For example, the time from when the first opening and closing door 57b moves to the closed state to when the second opening and closing door 58b opens is the second opening and closing door 58b after the game ball enters the uppermost upstream part of the first opening and closing door 57b. If the time is set to be shorter than the time required to enter the most downstream portion of the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the , as shown in the opening of the second opening and closing door 58b in the second round of FIG. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV. On the other hand, the time from when the first opening and closing door 57b moves to the closed state until the second opening and closing door 58b opens is the second opening and closing door 58b after the game ball enters the most upstream part of the first opening and closing door 57b. If the time is set longer than the time required to enter the most downstream part of the area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the , as shown in the opening of the second opening and closing door 58b in the fourth round of FIG. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning area FV.

In this way, it is possible to variously combine the opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b within a series of opening patterns. Furthermore, it is possible to control the entry of the game ball into the V winning area FV by setting the timing of opening the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b to the opening scenario and controlling it.

In addition, as an opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door, an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 57b is opened or closed, or an opening/closing pattern in which only the second opening/closing door 58b is opened/closed may be set in the opening scenario.

In addition, in the above-described third embodiment, an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball easily enters the V winning area FV and an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball hardly enters the V winning area FV are set as the opening scenarios. , an opening/closing pattern in which the probability that a game ball enters the V winning area FV during execution of the opening/closing mode and the probability that the game ball does not enter the V winning area FV are substantially equal, An opening/closing pattern in which the probability of a game ball entering is about 70% may be set as the opening scenario. In the case of such an opening/closing pattern, depending on the behavior of the game ball, there are cases where the ball enters the V winning area FV and cases where the ball does not enter the V winning area FV, so that the player is given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. be able to.

C7-4. Variant 4:
In the above-described third embodiment, the opening and closing of the two ball entry areas, the V non-winning area FNV and the V winning area FV, are controlled by one opening/closing door (the second opening/closing door 58b). By adopting a configuration that controls the opening and closing of an arbitrary number of ball entry areas with one opening/closing door, and controlling the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door, it is possible to control the entry of a game ball into each ball entry area. . In addition, the area into which the game ball enters is not limited to the large winning opening, and various ball entry openings may be applied. In this modified example, the description will be generalized as a ball-entering area in which a game ball can enter.

FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH as Modification 4. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the variable winning mechanism KH has three adjacent ball entry areas (a ball entry area U1, a ball entry area U2, has a ball entry area U3). In addition, the variable winning mechanism KH includes an opening/closing door R that controls opening/closing of the three ball entry areas. That is, by opening and closing the opening and closing door R, the three ball entry areas are changed into a non-enterable state in which entry of a game ball is impossible or difficult, and a state in which entry of a game ball is possible or easy. , and transitions synchronously with Note that the operation of the opening/closing door R is controlled by the main controller 60 in the same manner as the first opening/closing door 57b and the second opening/closing door 58b in the third embodiment.

FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door R and the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern as Modification 4 of the third embodiment. The lower part of FIG. 106 shows a time chart showing the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door R, and the upper part of FIG. 106 shows a graph showing an example of the behavior of the game ball in the opening/closing pattern. The horizontal axis shown between the time chart shown in the lower part of FIG. 106 and the graph shown in the upper part of FIG. 106 indicates time (seconds) commonly used in the two figures.

In the case of the opening/closing pattern shown in FIG. 106, by controlling the time from when the opening/closing door R shifts to the closed state to when the opening/closing door R is opened next time, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls entering each ball entry area. can be controlled. It should be noted that the time from when the opening/closing door R shifts to the closed state to when the opening/closing door R is next opened can be set in the opening scenario.

As shown in the figure, in this modification, control is performed so that the game ball enters only the ball entry area U1 when the opening/closing door R is opened for the first time, and the ball entry area U1 is controlled when the opening/closing door R is opened for the second time. and the game ball is controlled to enter the ball entry area U2, and when the opening/closing door R is opened for the third time, the game ball is controlled to enter the ball entry area U1, the ball entry area U2, and the ball entry area U3. Then, when the opening/closing door R is opened for the fourth time, similarly to the opening for the first time, control is performed so that the game ball enters only the ball entry area U1, and when the opening/closing door R is opened for the fifth time, the opening is performed for the second time. Similarly, the game ball is controlled to enter the ball entry area U1 and the ball entry area U2.

In this way, by adopting a configuration that controls the opening and closing of an arbitrary number of ball entry areas with one opening and closing door, and controlling the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door, the entry of game balls into each ball entry area is controlled. can do. Furthermore, since the state transitions of a plurality of ball-entering areas are synchronously executed, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the state transition is controlled for each ball-entering area.

In addition, the ball entry area U1, the ball entry area U2, and the ball entry area U3 are arranged adjacent to each other from upstream to downstream of the flow path, so that a plurality of ball entry areas correspond to the behavior of the game balls flowing through the flow path. When the transition of the state of the entering ball area is executed synchronously, it becomes possible to execute control corresponding to the behavior of a small number of game balls. Specifically, in order to synchronously execute the transition of the states of a plurality of ball-entering areas corresponding to the behavior of a game ball circulating in the flow path, a game ball circulating in the surrounding area of each ball-entering area is required. It is necessary to understand the behavior of For example, as a comparative example, when a plurality of ball entry areas are arranged at positions separated from each other, the state transition of the plurality of ball entry areas is synchronously executed in response to the behavior of the circulating game ball. In this case, it is necessary to perform control corresponding to the behavior of the game balls circulating in the peripheral areas of the respective ball entry areas that are located apart from each other, which complicates the control. That is, the total area including the surrounding areas of each ball entry area is relatively large, and the number of game balls circulating in the entire area is relatively large. The number increases and the control becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the plurality of ball entry areas in this modification are arranged adjacent to each other, the overall area including the peripheral areas of each ball entry area is smaller than in the above comparative example, and the ball circulates in the entire area. Since the number of game balls is also reduced, the number of game balls whose behavior is to be grasped is reduced, and the control can be simplified. Furthermore, in this modified example, the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, so that it is easy to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each ball entry area, and control is further simplified. can do. Specifically, since the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, the direction of the game ball reaching each ball entry area is somewhat constant, and each ball entry area Variation in the behavior of each game ball reaching each ball entering area can be reduced, such as small variations in the speed of each game ball reaching the area. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each ball entry area, and the control can be further simplified.

C7-5. Variant 5:
A configuration may be adopted in which an ejection delay means is provided to delay the ejection of the game ball entering the second big winning hole 58a from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a. A specific description will be given below.

Inside the second big winning hole 58a, a detection sensor is provided for determining whether or not all the game balls that entered the second big winning hole 58a have been discharged from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a. ing. Then, when the second big winning port 58a transitions to the closed state after the transition to the open state as one round, it is detected whether or not all the game balls have been discharged from the inside of the second big winning port 58a. Determined using a sensor. After that, the next round is executed on the condition that all the game balls are discharged from the second big winning hole 58a. Usually, the period until all the game balls are discharged from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a is longer than the period from after the second big winning hole 58a transitions to the closed state to the next open state. Since the length is shorter, it is possible to transition the second big winning port 58a to the open state at the opening timing set in the opening scenario.

In this modification, an ejection delay means is provided inside the second big winning hole 58a for delaying the ejection of the game ball from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a. As the discharge delay means, a circular croon having a concave upper surface, a detour channel provided in front of the discharge port of the second big prize winning port 58a, or the like can be adopted. In addition, any configuration may be employed as long as it is configured to delay the discharge of game balls from the inside of the second big winning hole 58a.

Due to the functioning of the discharge delay means, the timing at which all the game balls are discharged from the inside of the second large prize winning port 58a is higher than the timing at which the second large prize winning port 58a set in the open scenario transitions to the open state. In the latter case, 58a may transition to the open state at a timing later than the timing set in the open scenario. That is, depending on the amount of time that the discharge delay means delays the discharge of the game ball, the second big winning port 58a may transition to the open state at the timing set in the open scenario, or may be delayed from the timing set in the open scenario. may transition to the open state. Therefore, it is possible to change the timing of transitioning the second big winning hole 58a to the open state to a timing different from the preset timing.

As a result, for example, the second type jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and in the open/close execution mode, the first big prize opening 57a and the second big prize opening 58a are opened and closed at the timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV. Even if the opening scenario is set such that the action is executed, the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and the first big winning opening 57a and The opening and closing operation of the second big winning opening 58a may be executed, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of tension. That is, by providing the discharge delay means, even when the opening/closing execution mode is started with any type of big win (or small win) as a trigger, the player is given a sense of expectation and tension. can do.

In this modified example, the discharge delay means is provided inside the second big winning hole 58a, but it may be provided in the first big winning hole 57a, or the first big winning hole It may be provided in both the 57a and the second big winning opening 58a.

C7-6. Modification 6:
In the above-described third embodiment, the V winning area FV is a ball entry area set as a condition for executing the high probability mode for the entry of a game ball, but other configurations may be adopted. . For example, the V winning area FV may be a ball entry area set as a condition for winning a jackpot by entering a game ball. For example, a gaming machine (so-called It may be adopted as a V winning area in a 1 type 2 type mixer).

C7-7. Variant 7:
FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 7 of the third embodiment. As shown, the variable winning mechanism KH in Modification 7 includes a jump promotion member JP having a function of making the circulating game ball jump upstream from the second opening/closing door 58b on the circulation surface through which the game ball circulates. Prepare.

When the game ball circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH circulates through the jump promotion member JP at a predetermined speed or higher, the game ball floats, and when the second open/close door 58b is in an open state, a non-V winning area. It is possible to jump over the FNV and enter the V winning area FV. Therefore, even if an opening/closing pattern in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the V winning area FV is set as an opening scenario in the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible for the game ball to enter the V winning area FV due to the function of the jump promotion member JP. As a result, no matter what kind of big win (or small win) triggers the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tension. can.

Furthermore, the gaming machine in Modification 7 includes a speed reduction mechanism LT that slows down the speed of the game ball on the distribution path until the game ball reaches the variable winning mechanism KH. The game ball that has passed through the speed reduction mechanism LT has a slower speed when circulating through the variable winning mechanism KH than the game ball that circulates through the variable winning mechanism KH without circulating through the speed reduction mechanism LT, and circulates through the jump promotion member JP. Even if it floats up, it cannot jump over the non-V winning area FNV and enters the non-V winning area FNV.

Thus, by providing the speed reduction mechanism LT, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the game ball circulates through the speed reduction mechanism LT. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

D. Applies to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

E. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The feature group A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) for nonvolatilely storing detection information, which is information acquired based on detection by the detection means, while being stored inside the housing of the game machine main body. )When,
a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, the process execution means includes information storage means for non-volatilely storing detection information, which is information acquired based on detection by the detection means. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature A1, the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the information storage means of the process execution means stored inside the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since game machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases in which they are not connected to hall computers. Can not. The game machine of feature A1 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the information storage means of the process execution means stored inside the housing of the game machine main body, so that the game machine functions as a hall computer. Even if the game machine is not connected, the detection information can be obtained from the game machine main body. That is, the gaming machine of feature A1 is in a state in which the gaming machine and the detection information are always linked on a one-to-one basis, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (the state of being installed in a gaming hall or the state of circulation). It is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1,
A control means (main side CPU 62x) that controls the execution of the game is provided,
A gaming machine, wherein the processing execution means operates on the same power source as the control means.

According to feature A2, the processing execution means operates on the same power source as the control means. Even if a problem occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer or a problem occurs in the processing of the hall computer, as long as power is supplied to the gaming machine. , detection information can be obtained. If the control means and the process execution means are operated by different power supplies, and if there is a problem with the power supply of the process execution means, the detection information is acquired even though the game is being executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that it is not possible. On the other hand, according to feature A2, since the control means and the process execution means are operated by the same power source, the detection information can be acquired whenever the game is executable. Therefore, the reliability of detection information can be improved.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each period until a prescribed number (500) of game balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (ejection path detection sensor 44h).

According to feature A3, the detection information for each period until the specified number of game balls are detected by the predetermined detection means is stored, so the time until the specified number of game balls are detected by each gaming machine varies. Even if there is, it is possible to acquire the detection information that does not affect the variation of the time. That is, even if there is a height difference in the frequency with which game balls are shot, it is possible to acquire highly accurate detection information that is not easily affected by the difference.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The game machine, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period (every hour).

According to feature A4, the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period, so statistical processing using the concept of time can be performed using the detection information.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The gaming machine, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each period from when power supply to the gaming machine is started until the power is cut off.

According to feature A5, the information storage means stores detection information for each period from the start of power supply to the game machine until the power supply is interrupted. When installed, it is possible to acquire detection information for each business day of the game hall.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
with
The processing execution means is
Number-of-balls information for acquiring number-of-balls information (number-of-balls data) that is information relating to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) put out from the payout means as the number of prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means acquisition means;
A calculation executing means (CPU 308) for executing a predetermined calculation based on the detection information and the information on the number of winning balls;
with
The game machine, wherein the information storage means stores calculation result information that is information relating to calculation results (role product ratio, etc.) by the calculation execution means.

According to feature A6, the process execution means stores the calculation result information. Since the calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and the information on the number of prize balls, the information on the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine is reflected. Therefore, according to feature A6, it is possible to acquire the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the paid-out prize balls. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the paid-out prize balls.

<Characteristic group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling execution of games;
Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for executing calculation processing based on the first information obtained based on the executed game and the preset second information and obtaining the third information;
Information storage means (computation result storage memory 309) for storing the third information in a non-volatile manner;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature B1, the first information is information obtained based on the played game, and the third information is information obtained based on the first information. Therefore, the third information contains information about the played game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including the information about the played game, the third information stored in the information storage means can be used to obtain the information about the game played in the past. can be obtained. Therefore, by using the third information, it becomes possible to manage the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine. Since the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means, the third information can be acquired if power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power sources, and if there is a problem in the power supply of the arithmetic execution means and the information storage means, the game is executed by the gaming machine. In spite of this, there arises a problem that the third information cannot be obtained. On the other hand, according to feature B2, since the arithmetic execution means, the information storage means, and the control means are operated by the same power supply, the third information is always acquired if the game can be executed. be able to. Therefore, the reliability of the third information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
A game machine, comprising a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine.

According to feature B2, since the transmission means is provided for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine, the third information is transmitted using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine used.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
with
The first information is information acquired based on detection by the detection means,
The second information is information relating to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out from the payout means as the prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means,
A gaming machine, wherein the third information is information relating to the number of winning balls put out by the gaming machine in the executed game.

According to feature B3, the third information is information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, using the third information stored in the information storage means, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine relating to the actually paid out prize balls.

<Characteristic group C>
The feature group C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling execution of games;
information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) for nonvolatilely storing first information acquired based on the executed game;
A gaming machine comprising
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature C1, the information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the information storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage means is altered through physical contact with the information storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Become. Therefore, unauthorized modification of the first information can be prevented. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the distribution process. is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the first information by someone can be suppressed. In addition, since the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to use the first information to manage and inspect the game-related characteristics of the gaming machine. Therefore, according to the characteristic C1, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the first information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
A gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature C2, since the information storage means operates with the same power source as the control means, the first information can be acquired if power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power supplies, and if there is a problem with the power supply to the information storage means, the first information is not displayed even though the game is being executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that the can not be obtained. On the other hand, according to feature C2, since the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power supply, the first information can always be acquired if the game is executable. Therefore, the reliability of the first information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A game machine, comprising a transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine.

According to feature C3, since the transmission means for transmitting the first information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the game machine is provided, the first information is transmitted using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine used.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature group D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
A first prize ball number information storage for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means. means (main-side ROM 63);
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
a winning ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the winning ball number information stored in the first winning ball number storage means;
a second prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquisition means;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
By executing calculation based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means, the game is played. Calculation executing means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information about the history of
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The information on the number of winning balls set in the gaming machine is generally set to a different value for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

According to feature D1, the process execution means acquires the number of prize balls information stored in the first number of prize balls storage means, so that different number of prize balls information is set for each type (model) of the gaming machine. However, the process executing means can calculate correct game history information using the information on the number of winning balls set for each type of gaming machine.

If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, by checking the game history information, the inspector of the gaming machine can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1,
a winning ball number information transmitting means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the winning ball number information stored in the first winning ball number information storage means to the processing execution means;
The gaming machine, wherein the acquisition means acquires the number of prize balls information by receiving the signal transmitted from the number of prize balls information transmission means.

According to feature D2, since a signal including the number of prize balls information stored in the first number of prize balls information storage means is transmitted to the processing execution means, the processing execution means accesses the first number of prize balls storage means. Even if the processing execution means cannot grasp the storage position (memory address) of the prize number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, the process execution means can acquire the number of prize balls information stored in the first number of prize balls storage means.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to feature D3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature D4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
The shooting means is configured so as not to be able to shoot game balls until the processing execution means completes the storage of the number of winning balls information in the second number of winning balls information storage means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature D5, the game ball is not shot until the storage of the number of prize balls information in the second number of prize ball information storage means is completed. can be suppressed.

<Characteristic group E>
The feature group E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Each time the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) stored in the number information storage means (discharge passage passage number N _OUT ) reaches a specified value (500), the Information on the game history is obtained by performing calculation based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the information on the number of prize balls stored in the number information storage means. Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio etc.)
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, since the game history information is calculated each time the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detecting means reaches the specified value, the number of game balls detected by each gaming machine reaches the specified value. Even if there is a variation in the time, it is possible to calculate the game history information that does not affect the variation in the time. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency with which game balls are detected, it is possible to calculate highly accurate game history information that is less affected by the difference. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm highly accurate gaming history information, and can appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified or not. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
First calculation execution condition storage means (main ROM 63 ),
The processing execution means is
Calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution condition stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means;
a second computation execution condition storage means (computation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired computation execution condition;
with
The game machine, wherein the calculation execution means executes the calculation when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

If the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimal conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the game machine as the operation execution condition.

According to feature E2, the processing execution means acquires the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means, so that the operation execution condition set for each type (model) of the game machine is established. Operations can be performed when

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
The processing execution means is
A game machine, comprising: erasing means for erasing information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means after the arithmetic execution means has executed the arithmetic operation.

According to feature E3, after the calculation execution means executes the calculation, the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means is erased, so the information on the number of game balls is stored again in the number information storage means. It becomes possible to Therefore, the storage capacity required for the number information storage means can be reduced.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to the feature E4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature E5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Feature group F>
The feature group F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Every time a predetermined time (one hour) elapses, based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize balls information storage means. Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history, by executing calculations with
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature F1, since game history information is calculated each time a predetermined time elapses, an inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information calculated by statistical processing using the concept of time. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
A first calculation execution condition storage means (main-side ROM 63) for storing information about a time interval for executing the calculation as a calculation execution condition that is a condition for executing the calculation,
The processing execution means is
Calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage means;
a second computation execution condition storage means (computation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired computation execution condition;
with
The game machine, wherein the calculation execution means executes the calculation when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

If the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimal conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the game machine as the operation execution condition.

According to feature F2, the processing execution means acquires the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means, so that the operation execution condition set for each type (model) of the game machine is established. Operations can be performed when

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time since the calculation was performed;
a determination means for determining whether or not a game is being played by a player;
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the measurement means interrupts the measurement of the elapsed time during a period in which the determination means determines that no game is played.

According to the feature F3, the measurement of the elapsed time from the execution of the calculation is interrupted during the period during which it is determined that no game is being played. Historical information can be calculated.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to the feature F4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature F5, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group G>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
a monitoring means (blackout monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of power interruption;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
When the monitoring means detects the occurrence of the interruption of the power supply, the information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize ball information storage means Calculation executing means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (character ratio, etc.), which is information related to game history, by executing calculations based on
game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, since the game history information is calculated when the occurrence of power cutoff is detected, it is detected during the period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the power cutoff occurs. The game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls. That is, since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start of the game hall to the end of the business, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the game machine can easily grasp whether or not there is a change in the characteristics of the game history information over the business days of the game hall, so that the game machine is not illicitly remodeled. It is possible to appropriately determine whether As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
A gaming machine comprising supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the arithmetic execution means even after the interruption of the power supply has occurred.

According to the feature G2, since the supply means for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after the power is cut off is provided, the game history information is calculated by the calculation execution means and the game history information storage means for the game history information. can be reliably completed.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to the feature G3, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature G4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group H>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
an informing means for informing in a predetermined case;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Game history information, which is information about a game history, based on the information about the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number information storage means. Calculation means (CPU 308) for calculating (accessory ratio, etc.);
game history information storage means (computation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
with
The gaming machine, wherein the notifying means notifies when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature H1, when the game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the game machine inspector can easily find the game machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
The notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer within a predetermined range. machine.

According to the feature H2, when the specific value included in the game history information is out of the predetermined range, notification is given. A game machine that is no longer included in the list can be easily found. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines a mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to feature H3, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how the specific value included in the game history information falls within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a degree of deviation.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic H4, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the game history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
A game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine. game machine.

According to feature H5, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

According to feature H6, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
a process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The processing execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) a memory 306 for storing ball number data;
Ball entry information storage means (ball entry information storage memory 309b) for sequentially storing ball entry information, which is information indicating that a game ball has been detected by the detection means, each time a game ball is detected by the detection means. When,
For a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine, the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information storage means and the prize balls stored in the prize number information storage means a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting number information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I1, since the information on the number of winning balls and the information on the number of winning balls are transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device is information related to the game history based on the information on the number of winning balls and the information on the number of winning balls. Game history information can be calculated within an arbitrary range. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the game history information of the gaming machine calculated within an arbitrary range by using a predetermined device, and can appropriately check whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. It becomes possible to judge As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1,
Date and time information acquisition means (RTC 96) for acquiring date and time information that is information about date and time,
The game machine, wherein the entering ball information storage means adds and stores the date and time information corresponding to the date and time when the game ball was detected by the detecting means when storing the entering ball information.

According to feature I2, the predetermined device that receives the ball entry information to which the date and time information is added can specify the date and time range and calculate the game history information. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can perform a detailed inspection based on the game history information specifying the date and time range. Further, if a predetermined device displays ball entry information to which date and time information is added, the inspector of the gaming machine can also grasp the date and time when the game ball was detected by each detection means. .

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the entered ball information stored in the entered ball information storage means.

According to feature I3, since the ball entry information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the ball entry information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the ball entry information. You can check the information.

<Characteristic group J>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
Prize ball number information storage means (mainly side ROM 63),
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, prize ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45), which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.), and detection information of game balls detected by the detection means and the prize balls stored in the prize ball number information storage means. a processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) for executing a process of calculating game history information (character product ratio, etc.), which is information related to the history of a game, by executing calculations based on numerical information;
game history information storage means (main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x) for storing the game history information calculated by the process execution means while being stored in the housing of the game machine main body;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J1, the game history information storage means for storing the game history information is provided. Since the game history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the game history information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the game history information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature J1, the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the game history information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine of feature J1 stores the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the game history information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body, so that the game machine is connected to the hall computer. Even in a state in which the game machine main body is not in a state where the game history information is not installed, the game history information can be obtained from the game machine main body. That is, according to the feature J1, it is possible to link the game machine and the game history information on a one-to-one basis, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature J1, since a single process execution means executes the game progress process and the process of calculating the game history information, it is not necessary to provide a separate calculation chip or the like for executing the calculation process. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to feature J1,
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second mode, the game progress processing is not executed even when a game ball passes through the predetermined area.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, so it is not preferable to execute the game progress processing in parallel. In the second mode, it is possible to execute processing, processing that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress processing, and the like. Further, according to the feature J2, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when developing the program for the process to be executed in the second mode, the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to take countermeasures into consideration, the development efficiency of the program for the processing executed in the second mode can be significantly improved.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to feature J2,
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the game history information.

The game history information is information whose content changes when a game ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration for executing the process of outputting the game history information in parallel with the game progress process is adopted, the game progress can be made while the inspector of the gaming machine is inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the game history information. The content of the game history information may change from time to time as the process is executed, making it difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the feature J3, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the game history information is output in the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed, so the game history information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the game history information from changing while the game history information is being played. As a result, the game machine inspector can smoothly perform the inspection.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button). When the operation of doing is executed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when the predetermined time comes), the timing when the second condition is established (the symbol variation display process ends) The timing at which the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as the timing at which the game progress processing is completed, and the timing at which all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the transition from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

According to feature J4, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is configured to shift to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied or not, the second mode is more effective than the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode is shifted from the first mode to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied, the first If the first condition that a predetermined operation has been executed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is being executed in the mode of (2), the second condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display. mode, it becomes difficult to control the timing of symbol stoppage and the control of the symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, according to feature J4, for example, the first condition is that a predetermined operation is performed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being performed in the first mode. If it is satisfied, the transition to the second mode is made at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variable display process is not executed is satisfied, that is, at the timing after the symbols being displayed in the variable display are stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbols and the variation time of the symbols.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the third condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode), an operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode (the operation of pressing the mode switching button, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed, the transition from the second mode to the first mode is not performed. A game machine characterized by being configured to shift to a mode.

According to feature J5, when the third condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode is not executed, Since it is configured so as to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to prevent returning to the first mode without executing the transition operation. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to execute the transition operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player cannot play a game on the gaming machine.

[Feature J6]
The gaming machine according to feature J5,
The gaming machine, wherein the third condition is that a predetermined time has passed since a predetermined time (10 minutes have passed since the game was switched to the inspection mode).

According to feature J6, if a predetermined time has elapsed since a predetermined point in time during the second mode, it means that the transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. However, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably prevent a return to the first mode without executing the transition operation. For example, even if the manager of the gaming machine, the inspector, or the like forgets to execute the transition operation after the transition to the second mode, after a predetermined time has passed since the predetermined time, the first mode will be activated. Since the game machine returns to the mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress processing can be executed and the player cannot play a game with the game machine.

[Feature J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6,
a game progress processing information storage means (main side RAM 64) stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and storing information related to the game progress processing;
Based on the execution of an erasing operation (operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button), which is an operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means, the game erasing means for erasing information stored in the progress processing information storage means;
with
The processing execution means is
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
In the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (state during inspection mode, state in which the power supply is turned off as it is after shifting to inspection mode), the erasing means: A gaming machine characterized in that the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not deleted even when the deletion operation is executed.

According to the feature J7, in the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode, an erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is executed. Even in this case, the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased. Even if an erase operation is mistakenly executed in an attempt to migrate the information, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

For example, an erasing operation for erasing information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasing button. In a configuration in which the operation for shifting the mode between the Although the user intends to press the power button while pressing , there is a risk of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the button for erasure is erroneously executed. Even if the information is accidentally erased, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progressing process that has been executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progressing process is stored in the game progress processing information storage means after returning to the second mode, the transition button is pressed to return from the second mode to the first mode. If the user intends to press the power button while pressing it, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the button for erasing, the information for restarting the game progress process is erased. After returning to mode 1, the game progress processing cannot be restarted, and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. On the other hand, according to feature J7, in the state after shifting to the second mode but before shifting to the first mode, the erase button is erroneously pressed in an attempt to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while playing the game, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means from being erroneously erased, thus giving a disadvantage to the player. can be suppressed.

[Feature J8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information.

According to feature J8, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. You can check the information.

[Feature J9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8,
A gaming machine, wherein the game history information storage means is composed of a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) capable of retaining data even if power supply is interrupted.

According to the feature J9, since the game history information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine). However, the game machine and the game history information can always be linked on a one-to-one basis, and the characteristics of the game machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature J10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9,
A game machine, wherein the game history information storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is attached) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature J10, the game history information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the game history information storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is altered through physical contact with the game history information storage means, it is possible to ascertain the alteration from the traces on the housing. becomes possible. Therefore, unauthorized modification of the game history information can be prevented. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the distribution process. Even in a situation where game machines are distributed from time to time, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of game history information by someone. In addition, since the game history information is information acquired based on the games that have been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the game history information. Therefore, according to the feature J10, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the gaming history information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10,
A game machine, comprising: a notification means for notifying when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the characteristic J11, when the game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. can. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J12]
The gaming machine according to feature J11,
The notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is no longer within a predetermined range. machine.

According to the feature J12, when the specific value included in the game history information is outside the predetermined range, notification is given. A game machine that is no longer included in the list can be easily found. By checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature J13]
The gaming machine according to feature J12,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines a mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature J13, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how the specific value included in the game history information falls within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a degree of deviation.

[Feature J14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J11 to J13,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic J14, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the game history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group K>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, prize ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45), which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When a predetermined condition is met (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), a second mode (inspection mode) that is executed;
is executable and
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second mode, the game progress processing is not executed even when a game ball passes through the predetermined area.

According to the feature K1, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, so it is not preferable to execute the game progress processing in parallel. In the second mode, it is possible to execute processing, processing that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress processing, and the like. Further, according to the characteristic K1, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when developing the program for the process to be executed in the second mode, the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to take countermeasures into consideration, the development efficiency of the program for the processing executed in the second mode can be significantly improved.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role ratio, etc.); ) (computation result storage memory 309, entry number storage memory 309a, entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the characteristic K2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature K2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. Since the gaming machine of feature K2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature K2, it is possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, the detection information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the process of outputting the detection information is executed in parallel with the game progress process, the game progress process may be executed while the inspector of the gaming machine is inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the detection information. The content of the detection information may change at any time after execution, making it difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the characteristic K2, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the detection information is output in the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed, so the detection information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the detection information from changing in between. As a result, the game machine inspector can smoothly perform the inspection.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to feature K2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature K3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory (calculation result storage memory 309, winning ball number storing memory 309a, winning ball information storing memory 309b, flash memory) capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

According to the feature K4, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is retained. Also, it is possible to always link the gaming machine and the detection information on a one-to-one basis, so that the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4,
A gaming machine, wherein the storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a seal is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature K5, the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, traces of the opening of the housing remain. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, they come into contact with various external sources during the process of being distributed. Even if the information is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone can be suppressed. Further, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the characteristic K5, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K5,
A gaming machine, comprising: a notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature K6, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given, so the inspector of the game machine can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K7]
The gaming machine according to feature K6,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature K7, when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the notification is given, so the inspector of the gaming machine can check whether the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature K8]
The gaming machine according to feature K7,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines a mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature K8, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of divergence of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature K9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K6 to K8,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic K9, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group L>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, prize ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45), which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button). When the operation of doing is executed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when the predetermined time comes), the timing when the second condition is established (the symbol variation display process ends) The timing at which the game progress processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as the timing at which the game progress processing is completed, and the timing at which all the processing of each game progress processing being executed is completed), the transition from the first mode to the second mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

According to feature L1, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is changed to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied or not, the second mode is more effective than the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the mode is shifted from the first mode to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied, the first If the first condition that a predetermined operation has been executed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is being executed in the mode of (2), the second condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display. mode, it becomes difficult to control the timing of symbol stoppage and the control of the symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, according to the feature L1, for example, the first condition is that a predetermined operation is performed while the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being performed in the first mode. If it is satisfied, the transition to the second mode is made at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variable display process is not executed is satisfied, that is, at the timing after the symbols being displayed in the variable display are stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of stopping the symbols and the variation time of the symbols.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role ratio, etc.); ) (computation result storage memory 309, entry number storage memory 309a, entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the characteristic L2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature L2, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since gaming machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine having the feature L2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature L2, it is possible to link the game machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to feature L2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature L3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory (calculation result storage memory 309, winning ball number storing memory 309a, winning ball information storing memory 309b, flash memory) capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

According to feature L4, even if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is retained. Also, it is possible to always link the gaming machine and the detection information on a one-to-one basis, so that the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4,
A gaming machine, wherein the storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a seal is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to feature L5, the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the storage means, traces of the opening of the housing remain. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to recognize the alteration from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, they come into contact with various external sources during the process of being distributed. Even if the information is distributed from time to time, unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone can be suppressed. Further, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature L5, the game machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L5,
A gaming machine, comprising: a notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature L6, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, notification is given, so the game machine inspector can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L7]
The gaming machine according to feature L6,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature L7, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, a notification is given, so the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm that the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L8]
The gaming machine according to feature L7,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines a mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature L8, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature L9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L8,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic L9, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic group M>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, prize ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45), which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed), the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection device. a second mode (inspection mode) which is executed when the 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
is executable and
When the second condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the shift to the inspection mode), a predetermined amount of time is required to shift from the second mode to the first mode. (the operation of pressing the mode switching button, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not performed, the mode is changed from the second mode to the first mode. A game machine characterized by being configured to shift.

According to feature M1, when the second condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed. , the second mode is changed to the first mode, it is possible to prevent a return to the first mode without executing a predetermined operation. For example, after shifting to the second mode, the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player cannot play a game on the gaming machine.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1,
A gaming machine, wherein the second condition is that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since a predetermined point in time (10 minutes have elapsed since transition to the inspection mode).

According to feature M2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined point in time during the second mode, a predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode has not been executed. Even if there is, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably prevent the return to the first mode without executing the predetermined operation. For example, even if the manager of the gaming machine, the inspector, or the like forgets to perform the predetermined operation after the transition to the second mode, the first mode will be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined point in time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine from returning to the first mode in which the game progress processing can be executed and the player cannot play with the game machine.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role ratio, etc.); ) (computation result storage memory 309, entry number storage memory 309a, entry information storage memory 309b, main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

According to the feature M3, it is possible to store the detection information and output the detection information in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature M3, the detection information, which is the information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since game machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine having the feature M3 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Even if there is, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine body. That is, according to the feature M3, it is possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature M3, after the inspector of the gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the detection information output in the second mode, the operator forgets to execute a predetermined operation, and the gaming machine fails to operate. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot play a game on the gaming machine without returning to the first mode in which progress processing can be executed.

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to feature M3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature M4, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature M5]
A gaming machine according to feature M3 or feature M4,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory (calculation result storage memory 309, winning ball number storing memory 309a, winning ball information storing memory 309b, flash memory) capable of retaining data even when the power supply is cut off. A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

According to the feature M5, the detection information is retained even if the supply of power to the game machine is cut off. Also, it is possible to always link the gaming machine and the detection information on a one-to-one basis, so that the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5,
A gaming machine, wherein the storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a seal is affixed) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to the feature M6, the storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to ascertain the alteration from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the process of distribution. Even if the information is distributed from time to time, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information by someone. Moreover, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature M6, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M6,
A gaming machine, comprising: a notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature M7, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given, so the inspector of the game machine can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M8]
The gaming machine according to feature M7,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature M8, when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the notification is given, so the inspector of the gaming machine can check whether the specific value included in the detection information is included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature M9]
The gaming machine according to feature M8,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines a mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature M9, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature M10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M7 to M9,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the feature M10, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic N group>
The N groups of features are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress process (jackpot lottery process, electrical opening lottery process, award ball payout process, pattern display on the main display unit 45) is a process for progressing a game based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means. game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body and storing information related to the game progress process;
erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means based on execution of a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing a power button while pressing a RAM clear button);
with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
a first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
When a predetermined condition is met (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer), a second mode (inspection mode) that is executed;
is executable and
In the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode (state during inspection mode, state in which the power supply is turned off as it is after shifting to inspection mode), the erasing means: A gaming machine, wherein the information stored in the storage means is not deleted even when the predetermined operation is executed.

According to feature N1, in the state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode, even if a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the storage means is executed. Even if there is, the information stored in the storage means is not erased. is performed, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

For example, the predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the button for erasing. In a configuration in which the operation for mode transition is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is pressed to transition from the second mode to the first mode. Although the user intends to press the power button while pressing the erase button, there is a risk of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature N1, in the state after shifting to the second mode but before shifting to the first mode, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the button for erasing is performed by mistake. Even if the information is accidentally erased, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progressing process that has been executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progressing process is stored in the storage means for resuming after returning to the second mode, the power supply is pressed while the transition button is pressed to return from the second mode to the first mode. If the user accidentally presses the power button while pressing the button for erasing, the information for resuming the game progress process is erased, and the second mode is entered. The game progress processing cannot be resumed after returning, and there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged. On the other hand, according to feature N1, after shifting to the second mode but before shifting to the first mode, the user accidentally presses the erase button to shift to the first mode. Even if the power button is pressed while holding the power button, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the storage means from being erroneously erased, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged. can be suppressed.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
detection information stored in the housing of the main body of the gaming machine and based on the detection of game balls by the detection means (game history information including entering ball information, entering ball number information, role item ratio, etc.; ) is provided with detection information storage means for storing
A gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information (game history information including information on the number of balls entered, information on the number of balls entered, ratio of accessories, etc.).

According to the feature N2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs from game machine to game machine and is unique to the game machine. That is, the detection information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature N2, the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the detection information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine itself. When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can acquire information about the characteristics of the game machine. However, since game machines are distributed from time to time, there are cases where they are placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. Can not. The game machine having the feature N2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the game machine, in the detection information detection information storage means stored in the housing of the game machine main body, so that the game machine is connected to the hall computer. Even if it is not in the state, it is possible to acquire the detection information from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature N2, it is possible to link the game machine and the detection information one-to-one, and it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to feature N2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature N3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the game machine, the inspector of the game machine can confirm the detection information of the game machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3,
A gaming machine, wherein the detection information storage means is stored inside a housing (a board box to which a sealing sticker is attached) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

According to feature N4, the detection information storage means is stored inside the housing where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, when the detection information storage means is physically touched, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is altered through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it is possible to grasp the alteration from the traces on the housing. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the detection information. Since game machines are distributed from time to time, various external contacts are made during the distribution process. Even in a situation where machines are distributed from time to time, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information obtained based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to feature N4, it is possible to appropriately manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N4,
A game machine, comprising: a notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to the feature N5, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the notification is given, so the inspector of the game machine can easily find the game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N6]
The gaming machine according to feature N5,
The game machine, wherein the notification means notifies when a specific value (payout ratio, etc.) included in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is no longer within a predetermined range.

According to the feature N6, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the game machine inspector can confirm that the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find a game machine that is no longer available. By confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally remodeled. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N7]
The gaming machine according to feature N6,
The gaming machine, wherein the reporting means determines a mode of reporting (the color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to the feature N7, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of divergence of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a deviation.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7,
A gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to the characteristic N8, since the display means for performing a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

The inventions of the feature group A to feature group N solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games.

In addition to making games more interesting, various technical improvements have also been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and unauthorized modification of gaming machines.

For example, if a player commits an illegal act (so-called goto act), or if the nail provided on the game board of a pachinko machine is illegally bent and modified, each entry such as the general winning opening and the starting opening may be damaged. In some cases, the percentage of game balls entering the ball opening differs from what was originally assumed, and the performance and playability expected of the pachinko game machine are impaired. However, it has been very difficult to detect such fraud.

Such cheating may be committed by a player during the hours of operation of the gaming hall. In addition, there are cases in which unauthorized modifications are made by someone after the business hours of the game hall. Furthermore, there are cases where a game machine is illegally modified while being transported before it is installed in a game hall. Furthermore, there are cases where the game machine is illegally modified before it is shipped to the game hall. Also, there is a possibility that unauthorized modifications will be made before that.

In light of this situation, the purpose is to detect fraudulent acts and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines, and to improve the soundness of games.

<Characteristic group O>
The feature group O is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature O1]
first processing execution means (main controller 60) capable of transmitting first information (opening command) and second information (opening start command);
a second process execution means (sound emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information transmitted by the first process execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second processing execution means is
When the first information is received, a plurality of processes (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) are set to be sequentially executed, and the set plurality of processes are sequentially executed,
When the second information is received during the sequential execution of the set plurality of processes due to the reception of the first information, the process in progress is terminated and a specific process (round effect) is performed. A gaming machine characterized by executing

In a normal gaming machine that does not have the feature O1, when the second process execution means is caused to sequentially execute a plurality of processes, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to execute each process. to the second process executing means. When causing the second process execution means to execute a specific process, the first process execution means sends information for causing the second process execution means to execute the specific process to the second process execution means. Send to That is, the number of times the first process execution means transmits information to the second process execution means increases as the number of processes to be executed by the second process execution means increases.

Specifically, for example, after causing the second process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect), the second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed, and then a specific process (round effect), the first process executing means transmits information (opening command) for causing the second process executing means to execute the first process (opening effect), and then executes the second process. Information (right hitting notification command) for executing processing (right hitting notification effect) is transmitted, and information (opening start command) for executing specific processing (round effect) is transmitted. In this case, the first process execution means will transmit the information (command) to the second process execution means three times. Also, after causing the second process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect), when executing a specific process (round effect) without executing the second process (right-handed notification effect) , the first process executing means transmits information (opening command) for causing the second process executing means to execute the first process (opening effect), and then executes the second process (right-handed notification effect). Information (right-handed notification command) for executing is not transmitted, but information (open start command) for executing specific processing (round effect) is transmitted. In this case, the first process execution means transmits the information (command) twice to the second process execution means. That is, in a normal game machine, when the second process execution means is not caused to execute the second process (right-handed notification effect), the first process execution means sends information (command ) may be transmitted twice, but when the second process execution means is caused to execute the second process (right-handed notification effect), the first process execution means sends information to the second process execution means (command) will be sent three times.

On the other hand, according to feature O1, when the second process executing means receives the second information while sequentially executing a plurality of processes set by receiving the first information, Since the process being executed is terminated and the specific process is executed, even if the second process executing means is caused to execute the specific process after executing all the processes among the plurality of processes, , even if the second process execution means is caused to execute a specific process without executing unexecuted processes among the plurality of processes, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to perform What is necessary is just to transmit 1st information and 2nd information. That is, in either case, the first process execution means may transmit the information twice to the second process execution means.

Specifically, for example, when the second process execution means is set to sequentially execute a first process (opening effect) and a second process (right-handed notification effect) as a plurality of processes, Even if the second process executing means is caused to execute a specific process (round effect) after executing the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect), Even if the second process execution means is caused to execute a specific process (round effect) without executing the second process (right-handed notification effect) after executing the first process (opening effect), The first process executing means may transmit the first information (opening command) and the second information (opening start command) to the second process executing means. That is, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to execute the second process (right hitting notification effect) or not to execute the second process execution means. It suffices to send the information (command) twice. Therefore, according to feature O1, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means, and reduce the processing load on the first process execution means.

Furthermore, according to feature O1, the number of processes (the number of effects) actually executed among the plurality of set processes by changing the timing at which the second process execution means receives the second information. will change. Therefore, by controlling and changing the timing at which the first process execution means transmits the second information, the number of processes to be executed by the second process execution means can be changed.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
The second processing execution means is
When the first information is received, as the plurality of processes, the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect) are set to be sequentially executed,
After receiving the first information, when the second information is received before executing the second process, the second process set to be executed after the first process is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing (round effect) is executed without executing the processing of .

According to feature O2, the second process executing means is caused to execute a specific process (round effect) after executing the first process (opening effect) and the second process (right-handed notification effect). Even if there is, after executing the first processing (opening performance), the second processing (right-handed notification performance) is not executed, and the specific processing (round performance) is executed by the second processing execution means. Even in the case of opening, the first process executing means may transmit the first information (opening command) and the second information (opening start command) to the second process executing means. That is, the first process execution means causes the second process execution means to execute the second process (right hitting notification effect) or not to execute the second process execution means. It suffices to send the information (command) twice. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission of the first process execution means, and reduce the processing load of the first process execution means.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2,
The first process execution means executes a process related to progress of the game,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process executing means executes a process related to game presentation.

According to feature O3, in a gaming machine in which the first process execution means executes processes related to progress of a game, the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine according to feature O3 subordinate to feature O2,
The first processing execution means is
A privilege granting process (opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode), which is a process of granting a privilege to a player, can be executed,
The second processing execution means is
As the first process, a privilege granting start presentation (opening presentation) is executed, which is a presentation suggesting to the player that the privilege granting process will start,
As the second processing, a shooting mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect) is performed, which is a performance that suggests to the player the shooting mode of the game ball that is recommended during the execution of the privilege granting process,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the specific process, an effect during awarding of a privilege (round effect), which is an effect suggesting to a player that the privilege imparting process is being executed, is executed.

According to feature O4, in a gaming machine that executes the privilege giving start effect, the firing mode suggesting effect, and the privilege giving effect, the frequency of information transmission by the first process executing means can be reduced.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature P1]
first processing execution means (main controller 60) capable of transmitting first information (opening command) and second information (opening start command);
a second process execution means (sound emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information transmitted by the first process execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
When the first process execution means transmits the first information and then transmits the second information, the transmission interval is different,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second process executing means is configured to execute different processes.

In a normal game machine that does not have the feature P1, the first process execution means transmits information of various contents to the second process execution means. The second process execution means then executes a process corresponding to the content of the information received from the first process execution means. That is, in an ordinary game machine, the first process execution means transmits information of various contents to the second process execution means in order to cause the second process execution means to execute various kinds of processes.

On the other hand, according to feature P1, when the first process execution means transmits the first information and then the second information is transmitted at different intervals, the second process execution means are configured to execute different processing modes, the first processing execution means transmits various content information to the second processing execution device in order to cause the second processing execution device to execute various content processing. The processing load on the first process execution means can be reduced compared to the configuration of transmitting to the execution means.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to feature P1,
The first processing execution means is
A first transmission mode in which second information (opening start command) is transmitted after a first period (opening period of 10 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the first information (opening command);
A second transmission mode in which the second information (opening start command) is transmitted after a second period (opening period of 7 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the first information (opening command);
is executable and
The second processing execution means is
When the first process execution means executes the first transmission mode, the second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed,
When the first process execution means executes the second transmission mode, the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature P2, even when the second process execution means is caused to execute the first process (opening effect) and then execute the second process (right-handed notification effect), the second process execution means Even if the second process (right-handed notification effect) is not executed after causing the process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect), the first process execution means executes the first information (opening effect). command) is transmitted, then the second information (opening start command) may be transmitted. Information for executing the second process (right hitting notification command) when transmitting and executing the second process (right hitting notification effect) after executing the first process (opening effect) is transmitted, and if the second process (right hitting notification effect) is not executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed, information for executing the second process (right hitting notification command) is not transmitted (comparative example), the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to feature P2,
The second processing execution means is
When the first process execution means executes the first transmission mode, the third process (round production) becomes a processing mode to execute,
When the first process execution means executes the second transmission mode, after executing the first process (opening effect), without executing the second process (right hitting notification effect) A gaming machine characterized by a processing mode in which the third processing (round effect) is executed.

According to the feature P3, the second process execution means is caused to execute the first process (opening effect), then the second process (right-handed notification effect), and then the third process (round effect). is executed, the third process is executed without causing the second process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect) and then the second process (right-handed notification effect). (round effect), the first process execution means may transmit the second information (opening start command) after transmitting the first information (opening command). , transmits information (opening command) for causing the second process execution means to execute the first process (opening effect), and executes the first process (opening effect) and then executes the second process (right In the case of executing the hitting notification effect), information (right hitting notification command) for executing the second process is transmitted, and after executing the first process (opening effect), the second process (right If the hitting notification effect) is not to be executed, the information for executing the second process (right hitting notification command) is not transmitted, and the first process (opening effect) or the second process (right hitting notification effect ) is executed, and then information (opening start command) for executing the third process is transmitted when the third process (round effect) is executed (comparative example). By comparison, the processing load on the first processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
The first process execution means executes a process related to progress of the game,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process executing means executes a process related to game presentation.

According to feature P4, in a gaming machine in which the first process execution means executes processes related to progress of a game, the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature P5]
A gaming machine according to feature P4 subordinate to feature P3,
The first processing execution means is
A privilege granting process (opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode), which is a process of granting a privilege to a player, can be executed,
The second processing execution means is
As the first process, a privilege granting start presentation (opening presentation) is executed, which is a presentation suggesting to the player that the privilege granting process will start,
As the second processing, a shooting mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect) is performed, which is a performance that suggests to the player the shooting mode of the game ball that is recommended during the execution of the privilege granting process,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the third process, an effect during awarding of a privilege (round effect), which is an effect suggesting to a player that the privilege imparting process is being executed, is executed.

According to the feature P5, in the gaming machine that executes the privilege giving start effect, the firing mode suggesting effect, and the privilege giving effect, the frequency of information transmission by the first process executing means can be reduced.

[Feature P6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5,
The first process execution means is game progress process execution means (main controller 60) for executing processes related to progress of the game,
The game progress processing execution means includes:
A lottery process executing means for executing a predetermined lottery process (jackpot lottery);
Transmission means for sequentially transmitting a plurality of predetermined pieces of information (opening command and opening start command) when the result of the predetermined lottery process results in a predetermined result (jackpot);
An interval between transmissions when the transmission means sequentially transmits the plurality of predetermined information based on the gaming state (support mode state) when the predetermined lottery process with the predetermined result is executed a transmission interval determining means for determining
A game machine with

According to the feature P6, the interval of transmission when the predetermined plurality of pieces of information are sequentially transmitted is determined based on the game state when the predetermined lottery process with the predetermined result is executed. The device that has received the plurality of predetermined information performs processing corresponding to the game state when the lottery processing with the predetermined result is executed, based on the fact that the intervals at which the plurality of predetermined information are received are different. can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the game progress processing executing means, compared to a configuration in which various information with different contents are transmitted to another device in order to cause another device to execute processing corresponding to the game state.

[Feature P7]
The gaming machine according to feature P6,
The second process execution means is effect process execution means (sound emission control device 90) for executing processes related to game effects,
The effect processing execution means receives the predetermined plurality of information transmitted by the transmission means, and executes a mode corresponding to the game state based on the fact that the intervals of the reception are different (low frequency The opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are executed corresponding to the support mode, and only the opening effect is executed corresponding to the high-frequency support mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature P7, the effect process execution means receives a plurality of predetermined information transmitted by the transmission means of the game progress process execution means, and based on the fact that the reception intervals are different, the mode corresponding to the game state Therefore, compared with the configuration in which various information with different contents are transmitted to the effect processing execution means in order to cause the effect processing execution means to execute the processing corresponding to the game state, the game progress processing execution means Processing load can be reduced.

[Feature P8]
A gaming machine according to feature P6 or feature P7,
The game progress processing executing means executes privilege giving processing (opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode), which is processing for giving a privilege to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery processing is the predetermined result. provided with privilege grant processing execution means for
The shooting mode of the game ball recommended in the first gaming state (during the low-frequency support mode) is the first shooting mode (left-handed),
The shooting mode of the game ball recommended in the second game state (during the high-frequency support mode) is the second shooting mode (right hitting),
The shooting mode of the game ball recommended during execution of the privilege granting process is the second shooting mode (right-handed),
The transmission interval determination means,
When the game state when the predetermined lottery process with the predetermined result is executed is the first game state, the predetermined plurality of pieces of information are transmitted at the first transmission interval (10 second interval). decide to send
When the game state when the predetermined lottery process with the predetermined result is executed is the second game state, the plurality of predetermined information is transmitted at the second transmission interval (7-second interval). decide to send
The effect processing execution means is
This is an effect suggesting to the player that the shooting of the game ball in the second shooting mode is recommended when the predetermined plurality of information transmitted at the first transmission interval are received. Execute the firing mode suggestion production (right-handed notification production),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined plurality of information transmitted at the second transmission interval are received, the shooting mode suggesting effect (right-handed informing effect) is not executed.

According to the feature P8, when the recommended shooting mode of the game ball changes from the first shooting mode to the second shooting mode by executing the privilege giving process, the shooting mode suggesting effect recommending the second shooting mode. is executed, and if the recommended shooting mode of the game ball does not change to the second shooting mode even after the execution of the privilege giving process, the shooting mode suggesting effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the game progress processing executing means and to execute an appropriate mode of presentation corresponding to the game state when the predetermined lottery processing is executed.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
Game progress processing execution means (main controller 60) for executing processing related to game progress;
Effect processing execution means (audio light emission control device 90) for executing processing related to game effects,
A gaming machine comprising
The game progress processing execution means includes:
A lottery process executing means for executing a predetermined lottery process (jackpot lottery);
a game round process execution means for executing a game round process (variation display and stop display of symbols), which is a process for displaying the result of the predetermined lottery process;
privilege granting process execution means for executing privilege granting processing (opening/closing processing period in opening/closing execution mode), which is processing for granting a privilege to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery processing results in a predetermined result (big win); ,
The length of the waiting period (opening period), which is the period from the end of the game cycle process that has resulted in the predetermined result to the start of the privilege giving process, is determined based on the game state (support mode state). a waiting period determining means for
with
Although the effect processing executing means executes the same processing (processing for setting to execute an opening effect and a hitting to the right notification effect) regardless of the game state at the start of the waiting period, A gaming machine characterized in that, during the standby period, different effects are executed according to the game state.

According to the feature Q1, the effect process executing means executes the same process regardless of the game state at the start of the waiting period, but during the waiting period, different contents are executed according to the game state. Since the performance is executed, it is possible to execute the performance suitable for the waiting period whose length changes according to the game state without executing different processing according to the game state at the start of the waiting period. . That is, the effect processing executing means grasps the game state at the start of the waiting period and responds to the game state in order to execute the effect suitable for the waiting period whose length changes according to the game state. you don't have to do something different with it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect processing executing means.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The game progress processing execution means transmits first information (opening command) at the start of the waiting period, transmits second information (open start command) at the start of the privilege granting process,
The effect processing execution means is
When the first information is received, regardless of the game state, a process of setting a plurality of effects (opening effect and right-handed notification effect) to be sequentially executed is executed,
When the second information is received during the sequential execution of the set plurality of processes due to the reception of the first information, the performance being executed is ended and a specific performance (round performance) is performed. A gaming machine characterized by executing

According to the feature Q2, since the interval from when the effect processing execution means receives the first information to when it receives the second information varies depending on the game state, the first information is received. Of the plurality of effects set by the above, the number of effects that are actually executed decreases as the interval becomes shorter, and increases as the interval becomes longer. That is, according to the feature Q2, when the effect processing executing means receives the first information, the standby period is reduced by executing a simple process of setting to sequentially execute a plurality of effects regardless of the game state. It is possible to make the content of the effect executed in , differ according to the game state.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine according to feature Q2,
The effect processing execution means is
When the first information is received, regardless of the game state, as the plurality of effects, a first effect (opening effect) and a second effect (right-handed notification effect) are sequentially executed. set to
After receiving the first information, when the second information is received before executing the second effect, the second effect set to be executed after the first effect A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed without executing the effect.

According to the feature Q3, the second effect is executed by varying the interval from when the effect process executing means receives the first information until it receives the second information according to the game state. There are cases where it is not. Therefore, according to the feature Q3, simple processing is performed such that when the effect processing executing means receives the first information, the first effect and the second effect are set to be sequentially executed regardless of the game state. By executing it, it becomes possible to vary whether or not the second effect is executed in the waiting period according to the game state.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine according to feature Q3,
The effect processing execution means is
As the first effect, a privilege giving start effect (opening effect), which is a effect suggesting to the player that the privilege giving process is to be started, is executed;
As the second effect, a shooting mode suggesting effect (right-handed notification effect) is performed, which is a performance that suggests to the player the shooting mode of the game ball that is recommended during the execution of the privilege giving process,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the specific effect, a effect during awarding of a privilege (round effect), which is an effect suggesting to a player that the privilege imparting process is being executed, is executed.

According to the feature Q4, when the effect processing executing means receives the first information, the simple process of setting the privilege giving start effect and the firing mode suggesting effect to be executed sequentially regardless of the game state is executed. Thus, whether or not the firing mode suggesting effect is executed in the standby period before the effect during privilege application is started can be made different according to the game state.

<Characteristic group R>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 1 of the second embodiment.

[Feature R1]
a first process executing means (main controller 60) capable of transmitting predetermined information (opening command);
a second process execution means (audio emission control device 90) capable of receiving the predetermined information transmitted by the first process execution means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second processing execution means is
It is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state) of the first process execution means,
When the predetermined information (opening command) is received when the control state is the first state (low frequency support mode), a first process (opening effect) is executed,
When the predetermined information (opening command) is received when the control state is the second state (high-frequency support mode), processing different from the first processing (short opening effect) A gaming machine characterized by executing

According to the feature R1, even when the second process execution means is caused to execute the first process, and even when the second process execution means is caused to execute a process different from the first process, Even if there is, the first process execution means only needs to transmit predetermined information (information of the same content). Information for executing the first process is transmitted to the second process executing means, and when the second process executing means is caused to execute a process different from the first process, the different process is executed. The processing load on the first process execution means can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the information for executing the process is transmitted to the second process execution means.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to feature R1,
The second processing execution means is
When the predetermined information (opening command) is received when the state of the control is the first state (low-frequency support mode), the first processing (opening effect) is executed and then the second A game machine characterized by executing the processing of (right-handed notification effect).

According to feature R2, when the second process execution means receives predetermined information (opening command) when the state of control of the first process execution means is the first state (low-frequency support mode) , the second process (right-handed notification effect) is executed after the first process (opening effect) is executed. Configuration for transmitting information (opening command) for executing processing (opening effect) and transmitting information (right-handed notification command) for executing second processing (right-handed notification effect) (comparative example) , the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means can be reduced, and the processing load on the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
The first process execution means transmits state information (high-frequency support mode command, low-frequency support mode command) that is information about the state of the control when the state of the control changes,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process execution means grasps the control state of the first process execution means based on the state information received from the first process execution means.

According to feature R3, the first process execution means transmits state information that is information about the state of control when the state of control changes, and the second process execution means performs the second process based on the state information. Since the state of control of one process execution means is grasped, the first process execution means does not need to include information about the control state of the first process execution means in the predetermined information and transmit it. It is possible to reduce the processing load when the first processing executing means transmits predetermined information.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3,
The first process execution means executes a process related to progress of the game,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process executing means executes a process related to game presentation.

According to feature R4, in a gaming machine in which the first process execution means executes processes related to progress of a game, the frequency of information transmission by the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature R5]
A gaming machine according to feature R4 subordinate to feature R2,
The first processing execution means is
A privilege granting process (opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode), which is a process of granting a privilege to a player, can be executed,
The second processing execution means is
As the first process, a privilege granting start presentation (opening presentation) is executed, which is a presentation suggesting to the player that the privilege granting process will start,
As the second process, a shooting mode suggesting effect (right-handed notification effect) is performed, which is a performance that suggests to the player a recommended shooting mode of the game ball during execution of the privilege giving process. game machine.

According to the feature R5, in a gaming machine that executes a privilege giving start effect and a firing mode suggesting effect, it is possible to reduce the frequency of information transmission by the first process executing means.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 1 of the second embodiment.

[Feature S1]
A gaming machine comprising game progress processing execution means (main controller 60) for executing processing related to progress of a game,
The game progress processing execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a first game mode (low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second game mode (high frequency support mode, high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game mode. can be,
A lottery process executing means for executing a predetermined lottery process (jackpot lottery);
a game round process execution means for executing a game round process (variation display and stop display of symbols), which is a process for displaying the result of the predetermined lottery process;
privilege granting process execution means for executing privilege granting processing (opening/closing processing period in opening/closing execution mode), which is processing for granting a privilege to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery processing results in a predetermined result (big win); ,
with
The privilege provision processing execution means is
If the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined result during the first game mode, the first period (10 seconds) after the game round process with the predetermined result is completed After the opening period) has passed, the privilege granting process is started,
When the result of the predetermined lottery process is the predetermined result during the second game mode, the time period is longer than the first period after the game round process with the predetermined result is completed. A gaming machine, wherein the privilege giving process is started after a relatively short second period (opening period of 4 seconds) has passed.

According to the feature S1, when the result of a predetermined lottery process during the first game mode is a predetermined result, the game progress process executing means terminates the game round process with the predetermined result. After the lapse of the first period, the privilege granting process is started, and when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a predetermined result during the second game mode, the game round process that has the predetermined result Since the privilege giving process is started after the second period shorter than the first period has passed after the end of the second game mode, a sense of speed can be given to the game in the second game mode, and the game is completed. Interest can be improved.

Specifically, for example, during the second game mode, which is advantageous to the player, the expectation that the privilege granting process will start is high. Also, they are playing the game expecting that the privilege giving process will be started early. That is, during the second game mode, the player seeks a sense of speed in the game. According to the feature S1, during the second game mode, compared to during the first game mode, the privilege is granted in a shorter time after the game round process in which the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the predetermined result is completed. Since the process is started, a sense of speed can be imparted to the game during the second game mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
Equipped with an effect processing execution means (audio emission control device 90) that executes processing related to game effects,
The game progress processing execution means includes:
Predetermined information (opening command) is transmitted when the game round process in which the result of the lottery process is the predetermined result is completed, and second information (opening start command) is transmitted when the privilege granting process is started. ) is provided with information transmission means for transmitting
The effect processing execution means is
a first privilege granting start rendering (opening rendering), which is a rendering suggesting to the player that the privilege granting process will start;
a second privilege giving start effect (short opening effect), which is an effect suggesting to the player that the privilege giving process is to be started and which is temporally shorter than the first privilege giving start effect (short opening effect);
is executable and
It is possible to grasp the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means,
When the predetermined information is received during the first game mode, the first privilege giving start effect is executed in the first period,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined information is received during the second game mode, the second bonus giving start effect is executed during the second period.

According to the feature S2, the effect processing execution means can grasp the type of the game mode of the game progress processing execution means, and when predetermined information is received during the first game mode, in the first period When the first privilege giving start effect is executed and predetermined information is received during the second game mode, the second privilege giving start effect is executed in the second period, so the first period or It is possible to execute a privilege giving start effect respectively suitable for the length of time of the second period. Furthermore, according to the feature S2, even if the effect processing executing means is caused to execute the first privilege provision start effect, or even if it is caused to execute the second privilege provision start effect, the game progress process Since the execution means may transmit predetermined information (information of the same content), for example, when causing the effect processing execution means to execute the first privilege provision start effect, the first privilege provision start effect is executed. Information for execution is transmitted to the performance processing executing means, and information for executing the second privilege provision start performance is transmitted to the performance processing execution means when the second privilege provision start performance is to be executed. , the processing load on the game progress processing execution means can be reduced.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine according to feature S2,
The effect processing execution means is
During execution of the privilege granting process, it is possible to execute a shooting mode suggestion effect (right-handed notification effect), which is a performance that suggests to the player a recommended shooting mode of the game ball,
When the predetermined information is received during the first game mode, the firing mode suggesting effect is executed after the first privilege giving start effect is executed in the first period. game machine.

According to the feature S3, the effect processing executing means, when receiving the predetermined information during the first game mode, executes the first privilege giving start effect in the first period and then performs the firing mode suggesting effect. Therefore, before the privilege imparting process is executed, it is possible to suggest the game ball shooting mode recommended during the execution of the privilege imparting process to the player. To reduce the frequency of information transmission by the information transmission means of the game progress processing execution means, compared with the configuration in which the information transmission means separately transmits information for executing the firing mode suggesting performance to the performance processing execution means. can be done.

[Feature S4]
A gaming machine according to feature S2 or feature S3,
The game progress processing execution means transmits type information (high frequency support mode command, low frequency support mode command) that is information regarding the type of the game mode when the game mode changes,
The game machine, wherein the effect process execution means grasps the type of the game mode of the game progress process execution means based on the type information received from the game progress process execution means.

According to the feature S4, the game progress processing execution means transmits the type information that is information regarding the type of the game mode when the game mode changes, and the effect processing execution means receives the type received from the game progress process execution means. Since the type of game mode of the game progress process execution means is grasped based on the information, the game progress process execution means does not transmit the information on the game mode type of the game progress process execution means including the information in the predetermined information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the game progress processing executing means transmits the predetermined information.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification 2 and modification 3 of the second embodiment.

[Feature T1]
a first process executing means (main controller 60) capable of transmitting second information (opening start command) after transmitting first information (opening command);
a second processing execution means (sound emission control device 90) capable of receiving the first information and the second information;
A gaming machine comprising
The second processing execution means is
It is possible to grasp the control state (support mode state) of the first process execution means,
Based on the state of control, the content of processing (contents of presentation) to be executed in a period (opening period) from when the first information is received until when the second information is received is determined. Amusement machine.

According to feature T1, the second process execution means can grasp the control state of the first process execution means, and based on the control state of the first process execution means, the first process execution means Since the contents of the process to be executed are determined in the period from the reception of the information to the reception of the second information, the first process execution means can receive the first information and the second information according to its own control state. It is possible to transmit the first information and the second information in the same transmission mode every time without changing the mode of transmitting the information. Therefore, it is possible to omit the control necessary for the first process executing means to change the transmission mode for transmitting the first information and the second information according to its own control state. It is possible to reduce the processing load on the processing execution means of the above. Further, according to the feature T1, the first process execution means receives various contents of information in order to cause the second process execution means to execute various contents of processes according to the state of control of the first process execution means. to the second process execution means, the processing load on the first process execution means can be reduced.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
The gaming machine, wherein the first process executing means transmits the first information and the second information at the same interval even if the control states are different.

According to the characteristic T2, the first process execution means transmits the first information and the second information at the same interval even if the control states of the first process execution means are different. It is possible to omit the control required to change the interval of transmitting the first information and the second information according to the control state of the device itself, and reduce the processing load of the first processing execution means. be able to.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
The second processing execution means is
When the control state is the first state, in a first partial period included in a period (opening period) from the reception of the first information to the reception of the second information, the first a partial period included in the period from the reception of the first information to the reception of the second information and after the first partial period In the second partial period of the production including the second content (right hitting notification production) is executed,
When the control state is the second state, an effect including the first content (a portion of the long opening effect from 0 seconds to 7 seconds) is executed in the first partial period, and the second effect is executed. A game machine characterized by executing an effect including a third content (the part from 7 seconds to 10 seconds of the long opening effect in the modified example 2, and the round effect in the modified example 3) during the partial period of .

According to feature T3, an effect including the same content is executed in the first partial period regardless of the control state of the first process execution means, and in the second partial period, the first process execution means is controlled. Since a performance including different contents is executed according to the state of control, the player is given an expectation of how the contents of the performance will change from the first partial period to the second partial period. be able to. Further, according to the feature T3, it is possible to execute an effect including contents suitable for the state of control of the first process executing means in the second partial period.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The first process execution means transmits state information (high-frequency support mode command, low-frequency support mode command) that is information about the state of the control when the state of the control changes,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process execution means grasps the control state of the first process execution means based on the state information received from the first process execution means.

According to feature T4, the first process execution means transmits state information that is information about the state of control when the state of control changes, and the second process execution means executes the second process based on the state information. Since the state of control of the first process execution means is grasped, the first process execution means does not need to include information about the state of control of the first process execution means in the first information and transmit it. , the processing load when the first processing executing means transmits the first information can be reduced.

The inventions of the features O to T solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, technical improvements are made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (eg, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to improve the enjoyment of the games, reduce the processing load of the gaming machines, simplify control, and provide more sound games.

<Characteristic group U>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature U1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
A first ball entry area (non-V winning area FNV in the third embodiment) provided on the flow path and into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry area (V prize winning area) is provided on the downstream side of the flow path relative to the first ball entry area with respect to the direction in which the game ball circulates through the flow path. region FV); and
A mechanism that contributes to the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, the state transition means ( second opening and closing door),
with
The state transition means is
In the first state, the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area are set to a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second state, the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area are brought into a state in which a game ball can be entered or easily entered.

According to the feature U1, by controlling the timing of the state transition between the first state and the second state by the state transition means, it is possible to control the entry area into which the game ball is entered.

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to feature U1,
The state transition means is
The first flow path area (area corresponding to the non-V winning area FNV on the upper surface of the second opening/closing door), which is an area on the flow path corresponding to the first ball entering area (non-V winning area FNV), is a game ball. by making a transition from the first state to the second state during the period in which the is circulating, the game ball circulating on the flow path can enter the first ball entry area;
While maintaining the first state during the period in which the game ball circulates in the first flow path area, the game ball passes through the first flow path area and enters the second ball entry area (V winning area FV), which is the area on the flow path corresponding to the second state (the area corresponding to the V winning area FV on the upper surface of the second door). , thereby enabling or facilitating entry of a game ball circulating on the flow path into the second ball entry area.

According to feature U2, the state transition means controls the timing of the state transition between the first state and the second state, so that the game ball flowing through the flow path enters the first ball entry area. It is possible to variously control the ball entry area into which the game ball is entered, such as allowing the game ball circulating in the flow path to enter the second ball entry area. In other words, one state transition means can control the ball entry area into which the game ball is entered for the two ball entry areas.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
The state transition means is
an operation mode (opening/closing execution mode) in which state transitions between the first state and the second state are performed a plurality of times;
A region on the channel corresponding to the first ball entry region is defined as a first channel region,
The time required for the game ball to pass through the first flow path area is defined as the first flow path area passage time,
When the duration of the first state sandwiched between the second state and the next second state in the operation mode is defined as the first state duration,
As the operation mode, a first operation mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a first type jackpot) including a predetermined operation pattern in which the duration of the first state is longer than the passage time of the first flow path region is provided. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature U3, when the time interval at which the game ball periodically reaches the first flow path area and the game ball reaches the first flow path area is shorter than the passage time of the first flow path area By executing the first operation mode by the state transition means, at least one game ball that periodically reaches the first flow path area can enter the second ball entry area.

[Feature U4]
The gaming machine according to feature U3,
defining a region on the channel corresponding to the second ball entry region as a second channel region,
When the time required for a game ball to enter the first flow path area and exit the second flow path area is defined as the ball entry area passage time,
A game characterized in that, in the predetermined operation pattern included in the first operation mode, the first state duration is longer than the first passage area passage time and shorter than the ball entering area passage time. machine.

According to feature U4, during the execution of the predetermined operation pattern, at least one of the game balls that periodically reach the first flow path area can be made to enter the second ball entry area, and the second Almost all game balls reaching one channel area can enter either the first ball entering area or the second ball entering area.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to 4,
The state transition means is
An operation mode in which state transitions between the first state and the second state are performed a plurality of times,
A region on the channel corresponding to the first ball entry region is defined as a first channel region,
The time required for the game ball to pass through the first flow path area is defined as the first flow path area passage time,
When the duration of the first state sandwiched between the second state and the next second state in the operation mode is defined as a first state duration,
A gaming machine comprising, as the operation mode, a second operation mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a second jackpot) in which all of the first state durations are shorter than the first passage area passing time.

According to the feature U5, while executing the second operation mode, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entering area, and almost all of the balls reaching the first flow path area A game ball can enter the first ball entering area.

[Feature U6]
The gaming machine according to feature U5,
A third ball entry area (first big prize opening) is provided on the upstream side of the flow path from the first ball entry area, and a game ball can enter,
The third ball entry area is capable of transitioning between a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball and a state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball,
A region on the channel corresponding to the third ball entry region is defined as a third channel region,
When the time required for the game ball to enter the third flow path area and exit the first flow path area is defined as the second ball entry area entry time,
The state transition means is
When the second operation mode is executed, the point in time when the third ball-entering area transitions from a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter to a state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter As a criterion, the first state transition from the first state to the second state in the second operation mode is started before the second ball entry area entry time elapses;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature U6, it is possible to suppress the circulation of game balls on the second flow path area when the execution of the second operation mode is started. As a result, when the state transition means transitions from the first state to the second state with the start of the second operation mode, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entry area. . Therefore, it is possible to further suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entry area while the second operation mode is being executed.

<Characteristic group V>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature V1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
Based on the direction in which the game ball circulates through the flow path, the upstream side ball entry section (the first large prize winning opening in the third embodiment) and the downstream side ball entry section ( 2nd big prize mouth) and
The state of the upstream ball-entering section is divided into a non-enterable state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an entering state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. Upstream state transition means for transitioning between available state (open state);
downstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the downstream side entrance section between the non-enterable state and the enterable state;
Control means for controlling the upstream state transition means and the downstream state transition means;
A gaming machine comprising
The downstream ball-entering portion is divided into a first ball-entering area (non-V winning area FNV) and a second ball-entering area (V winning area FV) in order from the upstream side of the flow path,
an operation of the upstream side state transition means for transitioning the upstream side entering portion in the non-enterable state to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state; and the downstream state transition means. defined as a unit motion an operation of transitioning the downstream ball-entering portion in the non-enterable state to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state,
A gaming machine, wherein unit actions by the upstream state transition means and unit actions by the downstream state transition means are executed exclusively.

According to feature V1, the control means controls the timing of executing the unit action by the upstream side state transition means and the unit action by the downstream side state transition means, thereby allowing the game ball flowing through the flow path to enter the upstream side. The ball is entered only in the part, or the ball is entered only in the first ball entry area of the downstream side entrance part, or the ball is entered in the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area of the downstream side entrance part. It is possible to control the ball entry part or the ball entry area where the game ball is entered.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to feature V1,
The control means is
When a predetermined game state is started, prior to execution of the unit action by the downstream state transition means, the unit action is executed by the upstream state transition means,
The time from the end of the unit action by the upstream state transition means to the start of the unit action by the downstream state transition means is set so that the game ball is in the upstream ball entering portion in the non-enterable state. After entering the upstream channel region, which is the corresponding region on the channel, the first ball-entering region, which is the region on the channel corresponding to the first ball-entering region of the downstream-side ball-entering portion in the non-enterable state A gaming machine characterized in that control is performed in a time shorter than the time required to advance through one channel region.

According to feature V2, at the start of the unit action by the downstream side state transition means, a game ball exists in the downstream flow path area, which is the area on the flow path corresponding to the downstream ball entering portion in the non-enterable state. It is possible to suppress the game ball from unintentionally entering the downstream side ball entering portion along with the start of the unit action by the side state transition means. For example, by controlling the timing of executing the unit action by the upstream side state transition means and the unit action by the downstream side state transition means, the game ball circulating in the flow path is controlled to enter only the upstream ball entering portion. In this case, if the unit action by the downstream side state transition means is started first, a game ball exists in the downstream flow path area, and the game ball is placed in the downstream ball entering portion when the unit action is started by the downstream side state transition means. There is a risk of unintentionally entering the ball. On the other hand, by controlling as in this feature, it is possible to roughly control the timing at which the game ball circulates in the upstream channel region and the downstream channel region, and control the ball entry part or the ball entry region where the game ball is entered. can be made easier.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
The control means, when a first game state (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a second type jackpot) is started, a first game state that continuously executes the unit action by the downstream side state transition means a plurality of times. While executing the operation pattern of
The time from the end of one unit action in the plurality of continuous unit actions by the downstream state transition means for the first action pattern to the start of the next unit action is From entering the first flow path area, which is the area on the flow path corresponding to the first ball-entering area of the downstream-side ball-entering portion in a non-enterable state, to exiting the first flow path area A gaming machine characterized by being shorter than the time required for

According to feature V3, almost all game balls that have reached the downstream channel area can enter the first ball entering area of the downstream side ball entering section while the first operation pattern is being executed.

[Feature V4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
The control means, when a second game state (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the first type jackpot) is started, a second game state for continuously executing the unit action by the downstream side state transition means a plurality of times. While executing the operation pattern of
During the time from the end of one unit action in the plurality of continuous unit actions by the downstream side state transition means for the second action pattern to the start of the next unit action, the game ball is A gaming machine comprising a case where the time from entering the first flow path area to exiting the first flow path area is longer than the time required.

According to the feature V4, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entry area of the downstream side ball entry section while the second operation pattern is being executed.

[Feature V5]
The gaming machine according to feature V4,
The time from the end of one unit action in the plurality of continuous unit actions by the downstream state transition means for the second action pattern to the start of the next unit action is It is longer than the time required from entering the first flow path area to advancing out of the first flow path area, and the game ball corresponds to the downstream ball entry part in the non-enterable state A gaming machine characterized by being shorter than the time required from entering a downstream channel area, which is an area on a channel, to exiting the downstream channel area.

According to feature V5, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entering area of the downstream ball entering portion while executing the second operation pattern, and furthermore, while executing the second operation pattern, Almost all game balls that have reached the downstream flow path area can be entered into the downstream ball entry section.

<Characteristic group W>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature W1]
a plurality of ball entry areas into which game balls can enter;
a control means for controlling the states of the plurality of ball entry areas;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means synchronously executes the state transitions of the plurality of ball-entering areas (third embodiment and modification 4 of the third embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature W1, the gaming machine synchronously executes state transitions of a plurality of ball-entering areas, thereby simplifying control compared to controlling state transitions for each ball-entering area. be able to.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to feature W1,
Equipped with a flow path through which game balls circulate,
Based on the direction in which the game ball circulates through the flow path,
A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of ball-entering areas are arranged adjacently from upstream to downstream of the flow path.

According to the feature W2, since the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged adjacently from upstream to downstream of the flow path, the control means controls the plurality of entry areas corresponding to the behavior of the game ball flowing through the flow path. When executing the state transition of the ball area synchronously, it becomes possible to execute control corresponding to the behavior of a small number of game balls. Specifically, in order for the control means to synchronously execute the transition of the states of a plurality of ball-entering areas in response to the behavior of the game ball circulating through the flow path, the surrounding area of each ball-entering area must be circulated. It is necessary to grasp the behavior of the playing ball. For example, as a comparative example, when a plurality of ball entry areas are arranged at separate positions, the control means synchronizes the state transition of the plurality of ball entry areas in correspondence with the behavior of the circulating game balls. In order to execute it, it is necessary to perform control corresponding to the behavior of the game balls that circulate in the peripheral areas of the respective ball entry areas that are located away from each other, which complicates the control. That is, the total area including the surrounding areas of each ball entry area is relatively large, and the number of game balls circulating in the entire area is relatively large. The number increases and the control becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the plurality of ball-entering areas in this feature are arranged adjacently, the overall area including the surrounding areas of each ball-entering area is smaller than the above-mentioned comparative example, and the game that circulates in the entire area Since the number of balls is also reduced, the number of game balls whose behavior is to be grasped is reduced, and the control can be simplified. Furthermore, according to this feature, since the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, it is easy to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each ball entry area, and the control is simpler. can be Specifically, since the plurality of ball entry areas are arranged from upstream to downstream of the flow path, the direction of the game ball reaching each ball entry area is somewhat constant, and each ball entry area Variation in the behavior of each game ball reaching each ball entry area can be reduced, such as small variations in the speed of each game ball reaching the . As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the behavior of the game ball reaching each ball entry area, and the control can be further simplified.

[Feature W3]
A gaming machine according to feature W1 or feature W2,
The control means divides the plurality of ball-entering areas into a non-enterable state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an enterable state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. synchronously transition between states,
A unit operation is defined as an operation in which the control means transitions the plurality of ball-entering areas in the non-enterable state to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state,
When the time required for the game ball to pass through the area corresponding to each ball entering area in the non-enterable state is defined as the entering area passage time,
A non-ball-enterable state maintenance time, which is the time from the unit action to the next unit action executed by the control means, is set based on the ball-entering area passing time of each of the plurality of ball-entering areas. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature W3, the ball non-enterable state maintenance time is set based on the ball-entering area passage times of the plurality of ball-entering areas. Since it is possible to grasp the respective entering ball area passage times of a plurality of entering ball areas, it is possible to easily determine and set the non-entering ball possible state maintenance time and to simplify the control.

[Feature W4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3,
a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when a game ball enters each of the plurality of ball entry areas;
At least one of the plurality of ball entry areas (V winning area FV in the third embodiment) is provided with a privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means when the game ball enters the plurality of ball entry areas. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball entry area is different from other ball entry areas.

According to feature W4, since the privilege given to the player has a ball-entering area different from other ball-entering areas, the control means controls the mode of state transition of a plurality of ball-entering areas that are executed in synchronization. By doing so, it is possible to control the privilege given to the player.

<Characteristic group X>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature X1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
a first ball entry area provided on the flow path and into which a game ball can enter;
The state of the first ball-entering area is divided into a non-enterable state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an enterable state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. a state transition means for transitioning between
When the first ball-entering area is in the non-enterable state by the state transition means, the first ball-entering channel area, which is the area on the channel corresponding to the first ball-entering area, is changed to a game ball. First entering ball passage area passage time adjustment means for adjusting the first ball entering passage area passing time, which is the time required for the ball to pass through (the convex portion provided on the second opening and closing door in the third embodiment or , the magnetic member provided on the second opening/closing door in Modification 2 of the third embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature X1, the state transition means controls the timing of the state transition of the first ball entering area and adjusts the passage time of the first ball entering flow path area, thereby allowing the player to enter the first ball entering area. You can control the ease of entering the ball.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
When the unit motion is defined as an operation in which the state transition means transitions the first ball-entering area, which is in the non-enterable state, to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state,
The state transition means is in an operation mode for executing unit operations a plurality of times, and the time interval from the end of the unit operation to the start of the next unit operation is set to A gaming machine comprising a first operation mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a second type jackpot) which is an operation mode shorter than time.

According to the feature X2, while the state transition means is executing the first operation mode, almost all game balls that have reached the first ball entering area can enter the first ball entering area.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
When the unit motion is defined as an operation in which the state transition means transitions the first ball-entering area, which is in the non-enterable state, to the non-enterable state after transitioning to the non-enterable state,
The state transition means is in an operation mode for executing unit operations a plurality of times, and the time interval from the end of the unit operation to the start of the next unit operation is set to A gaming machine comprising a second operation mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to a first-class jackpot) that is an operation mode longer than time.

According to feature X3, while the state transition means is executing the second operation mode, it is possible to reduce the percentage of game balls that enter the first ball entry area compared to the first operation mode. . In other words, the game balls that have reached the first ball-entering area can pass through without entering the first ball-entering area at a predetermined rate.

[Feature X4]
The gaming machine according to feature X3,
A second ball entry area is provided downstream of the first ball entry area on the flow path with respect to the direction in which the game ball circulates through the flow path, and the game ball can enter the second ball entry area;
The state transition means transitions the first ball-entering area to the non-enterable state, simultaneously transitions the second ball-entering area to the non-enterable state, and shifts the first ball-entering area to the non-enterable state. to the enterable state and at the same time transitioning the second ball enterable area to the enterable state,
A region on the channel corresponding to the second ball entry region is defined as a second ball entry channel region,
When the time required for the game ball to enter the first ball-entering channel region and exit the second ball-entering channel region is defined as the total ball-entering channel region passing time,
In the second operation mode provided by the state transition means, the time interval from the end of the unit operation to the start of the next unit operation is longer than the first incoming ball passage region transit time. A gaming machine characterized in that the passing time is shorter than the passing time of the incoming ball passage area.

According to feature X4, the state transition means can cause almost all gaming balls that have passed through the first ball-entering area without entering the first ball-entering area when the second operation mode is executed to enter the second ball-entering area. .

[Feature X5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X4,
The state transition means includes an opening/closing member that opens and closes the opening of the first ball entry area,
The first ball-entering passage area passage time adjusting means is a convex member arranged on a circulation surface through which a game ball circulates in the opening/closing member when the first ball-entering area is in the non-enterable state. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature X5, by adjusting the number of convex members arranged on the flow surface of the opening/closing member, it is possible to easily adjust the passage time of the first ball entering flow path region.

[Feature X6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X5,
The state transition means includes an opening/closing member that opens and closes the opening of the first ball entry area,
The first ball-entering passage area passage time adjusting means is a magnetic material arranged on a circulation surface through which a game ball circulates in the opening/closing member when the first ball-entering area is in the non-enterable state. A gaming machine characterized by being a member.

According to the feature X6, the action of the magnetic force exerted on the game ball by the magnetic member makes the game ball circulating on the circulating surface move in a unique manner, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature X7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X6,
The state transition means includes an opening/closing member that opens and closes the opening of the first ball entry area,
wherein the first ball-entering passage area passage time adjusting means is an inclination of a flow surface through which a game ball circulates in the opening/closing member when the first ball-entering area is in the non-enterable state. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature X7, it is possible to easily adjust the passage time of the first ball entering flow path region by adjusting the inclination angle of the flow surface.

<Characteristic group Y>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
Based on the direction in which the game ball circulates through the flow path, the upstream side ball entry section (the first large prize winning opening in the third embodiment) and the downstream side ball entry section ( 2nd big prize mouth) and
The state of the upstream ball-entering section is divided into a non-enterable state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an entering state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. Upstream state transition means for transitioning between available state (open state);
downstream state transition means for transitioning the state of the downstream side entrance section between the non-enterable state and the enterable state;
A gaming machine comprising
The downstream ball entry portion is
It has a specific region (V winning region FV) which is a region set as one of the conditions for the entry of a game ball to change the state of the game to a specific state, and the specific region upstream from the specific region. A gaming machine characterized by having a predetermined area (non-V winning area FNV) that is different from the area.

According to the feature Y1, since the downstream side ball-entering section has a predetermined area upstream of the specific ball-entering area, the downstream state transition means controls the timing for transitioning the state of the downstream side ball-entering section. It is possible to control whether or not the game ball entering the side ball entering portion is made easier to enter the specific area. In the case of a general gaming machine, when one ball-entering section has two areas, a game controller is installed inside the ball-entering section to control which of the two areas a game ball is to enter. It has an induction mechanism that guides the ball. In the case of such a game machine, it is necessary to control the operation of the above-described guide mechanism separately from the operation control of the state transition means for controlling the state of the ball-entering section between the non-ball-enterable state and the ball-enterable state. Therefore, the control becomes complicated, and it is necessary to secure a storage area for storing the program for executing the control. On the other hand, in the gaming machine having this feature, it is possible to control the operation of the downstream side state transition means to control whether the game ball is to enter the predetermined area or the specific area provided in the downstream side ball entering section. , the control can be simplified and the storage area required for storing the program can be reduced as compared with the general gaming machine described above.

[Feature Y2]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1,
When the downstream ball-entering portion is in the non-enterable state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter,
A gaming machine, wherein when the downstream ball-entering section is in the ball-enterable state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where a game ball can be entered or easily entered.

According to feature Y2, by controlling the timing at which the downstream side state transition means changes the state of the downstream side ball entering section, in fact, the downstream side ball entering section at the timing at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area Even if the state of is changed to a ball-enterable state, when the downstream ball-entering section is in a ball-enterable state, both the predetermined area and the specific area are in a state where game balls can be entered or easily entered. Therefore, the player can expect the game ball to enter the specific area. More specifically, even if the state of the downstream side ball entry section is changed to a state where it is possible to enter the game ball at a timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area, the game ball does not enter the specific area. Even if the state of the downstream ball-entering section is changed to the ball-enterable state at an easy timing, when the downstream-side ball-entering section is in the ball-enterable state in both cases, the predetermined area and the specific area are both Since it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, the player can expect that the game ball will enter the specific area.

[Feature Y3]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2,
A downstream ball-entrance opening, which is an opening of the downstream-side ball-entrance part, faces the flow path surface,
The downstream-side state transition means changes the state of the downstream-side ball-entering portion to a non-enterable state by closing the downstream-side ball-entering portion opening, and closes the downstream-side ball-entering portion opening. transitioning the state of the downstream ball-entering portion to a ball-enterable state by opening the state;
When the downstream ball entry portion is in the non-enterable state, there are a specific region opening that is an opening through which a game ball enters the specific region, and an opening through which a game ball enters the predetermined region. The predetermined area openings are all in a closed state,
A gaming machine, wherein when the downstream side ball-entering portion is in the ball-enterable state, both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are in an open state.

According to feature Y3, when the downstream side ball entrance opening is closed, both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are closed, and when the downstream side ball entrance opening is open, Since both the specific area opening and the predetermined area opening are in an open state, either the specific area and the predetermined area are in a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, or both are It is possible to make it easy for the player to visually determine whether it is possible or easy to enter a ball. In addition, by controlling the timing at which the downstream side state transition means changes the state of the downstream side ball entrance opening, in fact, the downstream side ball entrance opening at the timing at which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area to the open state, the predetermined area opening and the specific area opening are both in the open state when the downstream ball entry opening is in the open state. It is possible to expect that the game ball will enter the specific area by pressing. More specifically, even if the state of the downstream side ball entry opening is changed to the open state at a timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area, the game ball does not enter the specific area. Even if the state of the downstream side ball entrance opening is changed to the open state at an easy timing, in both cases, when the downstream side ball entrance opening is in the open state, the predetermined area opening and the specific area opening Since all the parts are in the open state, the player can expect the game ball to enter the specific area.

[Feature Y4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y3,
The downstream ball-entering part opening, which is the opening of the downstream-side ball-entering part, faces the flow path surface of the flow path, and is a specific area opening that is an opening through which a game ball enters the specific area. and a predetermined area opening that is an opening through which a game ball enters the predetermined area,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined area opening faces the upstream side of the flow path surface with respect to the specific area opening.

According to feature Y4, the downstream side ball entrance opening is divided into a specific region opening and a predetermined region opening, and the predetermined region opening faces the upstream side of the flow channel surface rather than the specific region opening. there is Therefore, the downstream side state transition means controls the timing of transitioning the state of the downstream side ball-entering section in response to the behavior of the game ball flowing through the flow path surface, whereby the game ball entering the downstream side ball-entering section is controlled. can be controlled whether or not to make it easier to enter the ball into a specific area.

<Feature Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
The state of the ball-entering section is divided into a non-enterable state (closed state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and an enterable state in which it is possible or easy to enter a game ball. (Open state) state transition means for transitioning between,
a discharge means for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion;
a control means for controlling the state transition means;
A gaming machine comprising
A ball-enterable state transition condition is set in the control means, which is a condition for the state transition means to transition the ball-enterable portion from the non-ball-enterable state to the ball-enterable state,
The absence of a game ball in the entering ball section is included as the entering possible state transition condition,
The game machine further comprises discharge delay means (discharge delay means in Modification 5 of the third embodiment) for delaying discharge by the discharge means of the game ball that has entered the ball entering portion. Amusement machine.

According to the feature Z1, the non-existence of the game ball in the ball-entering portion is included as the ball-enterable state transition condition, and the ejection delay means for delaying the ejection of the game ball that has entered the ball-entering portion by the ejecting means. Prepare. Therefore, depending on the degree of time the ejection delaying means delays the ejection of the game ball, the time until the ball-enterable state transition condition is established differs. The time it takes to transition to the possible state is different. In other words, the time required for the state transition means to transition the ball-entering portion from the non-ball-enterable state to the ball-enterable state can be made irregular. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ejection delaying means and to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine according to feature Z1,
It is characterized in that the passage of a preset predetermined time after the state transition means transitions the ball-entering section to the non-ball-enterable state is included as the ball-enterable state transition condition. game machine.

According to feature Z2, the state transition condition that a predetermined time set in advance has elapsed after the state transition means transitions the ball-entering section to the non-enterable state is included as the enterable state transition condition. Therefore, from the time from when the ball-entering portion transitions to the non-enterable state to when all the game balls existing in the ball-entering portion are discharged by the discharging means and the game balls are no longer present in the ball-entering portion, the non-entering state is reduced. If the time from the transition to the ball-allowable state to the elapse of the predetermined time set in advance is longer, the time from the ball-entering portion transitioning from the non-ball-enterable state to the ball-enterable state is predetermined. It's time. On the other hand, due to the function of the ejection delay means, after the ball-entering section transitions to the non-enterable state, all the game balls existing in the ball-entering section are ejected by the ejection means, and there are no game balls in the ball-entering section. is longer than the time from the transition to the non-enterable state to the elapse of a predetermined time, the ball-entering section changes from the non-enterable state to the enterable state. The time until transition depends on the degree of time the discharge delay means delays the discharge of the game ball. Therefore, the time required for the state transition means to transition the ball-entering section from the non-ball-enterable state to the ball-enterable state can be made more irregular, and the state transition of the ball-entering section can be performed by simple control. can be complicated. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ball-entering section and to enhance the interest in the game.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
Equipped with a flow path through which game balls circulate,
The ball entry section includes a first ball entry area into which a game ball can enter, and a downstream side of the flow path relative to the first ball entry area with respect to the direction in which the game ball circulates in the flow path. and a second ball entry area (V winning area FV) in which a game ball can enter.

According to feature Z3, since the ball-entering section includes the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area downstream of the first ball-entering area, the ball-entering area can enter from a non-enterable state. Depending on the timing of transition to the ball-enabled state, the game ball entering the ball-entering portion may enter either the first ball-entering area or the second ball-entering area. Since the time required for the state transition means to transition the ball-entering section from the non-enterable state to the ball-enterable state is irregular, the player will not be able to determine whether the game ball that entered the ball-entering section is the first ball-entering state. It is difficult to predict whether the ball will enter the area or the second ball entering area, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the ball entering portion and the player can be given a sense of urgency.

[Feature Z4]
The gaming machine according to feature Z3,
The control unit
Triggered by the lapse of a predetermined time set in advance after the state transition means transitions the ball-entering section to the non-enterable state, the ball-entering section is changed from the non-enterable state to the ball-enterable state. A gaming machine characterized by controlling entry of a game ball into the second ball entry area by transitioning to a possible state.

According to feature Z4, the predetermined time is set so that the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball-entering area, or the predetermined time is set so that the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball-entering area. be able to. On the other hand, when the discharge delaying means functions, all game balls existing in the ball-entering part are discharged by the discharge means after the ball-entering part transitions to the non-enterable state by the function of the discharge delaying means. If the time until the game ball no longer exists in the ball-entering section is longer than the time from the transition to the non-ball-enterable state to the elapse of a preset predetermined time, the ball-entering section The time required for the transition from the ball non-enterable state to the ball enterable state depends on the degree of time the ejection delay means delays the ejection of the game ball. That is, there are cases where the control unit can control entry of game balls into the second ball entry area and cases where it is not possible. As a result, for example, even if the predetermined time is set so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering area, the discharge delay means functions to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entering area. The ball-entering portion may transition from a non-enterable state to a ball-enterable state at a timing when it is easy for the ball to enter the ball area, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension.

[Feature Z5]
A gaming machine according to feature Z3 or feature Z4,
The second ball entry area is an area set as one of the conditions for changing the game state to a specific state by the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry area. game machine.

According to the feature Z5, it is possible to give the player even more expectations and a sense of urgency regarding whether or not the game ball will enter the second ball entry area.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
a flow path through which game balls circulate;
A ball entry area provided on the flow path and capable of entering a game ball;
The state of the ball entry area is divided between a non-ball entry possible state in which entry of a game ball is impossible or difficult, and a ball entry possible state in which entry of a game ball is possible or easy. a state transition means for transitioning;
Passage suppressing means (plate-shaped member MD1 in modification 1 of the third embodiment, magnetic a body member MD2);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature αA1, since the passage suppressing means is provided, it is suppressed that the game ball passes through without entering the ball-entering area even though the ball-entering area is in the enterable state. If a game ball passes through the ball-entering area without entering the ball-entering area, the player is not given a legitimate privilege, and the player's expectation for the game is lowered. Let me. This feature can suppress such a phenomenon, properly grant the privilege to be granted to the player, and provide the player with a sense of expectation as well as a sense of security.

[Feature αA2]
The gaming machine according to feature αA1,
The passage suppressing means is a traveling direction correction member (third embodiment) that corrects the traveling direction of the game ball traveling in the direction of passing through the ball entering area to the direction of traveling toward the ball entering area (third embodiment). A gaming machine comprising the plate-shaped member MD1) according to Modified Example 1 of the form.

According to the feature αA2, since the passage suppressing means includes the advancing direction correcting means, for example, a game ball that has bounced in a direction different from the ball entry area due to an external dynamic factor applied to the game ball It is possible to correct the direction of travel and allow the game ball to enter the ball entry area.

[Feature αA3]
The gaming machine according to feature αA2,
A gaming machine, wherein the advancing direction correcting member is a member provided above a region on the flow path corresponding to the ball entering region.

According to the feature αA3, it is possible to suppress the phenomenon that the game ball advancing along the flow path floats from the flow path due to some factor and passes through the ball entry area in a floating state. That is, even if the game ball floats in the ball-entering area, the traveling direction of the game ball is changed downward by hitting a member provided in the upper part of the area corresponding to the ball-entering area on the flow path. A game ball can enter the ball entering area.

[Feature αA4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αA1 to αA3,
A gaming machine, wherein the passage suppressing means includes a magnetic member provided on the upstream side of the ball entry area in the flow path.

According to the feature αA4, even if a game ball traveling along the flow path receives a force in the direction of floating from the flow path due to some factor, the magnetic material provided on the flow path surface exerts the force on the game ball. Due to the magnetic force, a force acts on the game ball in the direction toward the flow path surface, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from floating from the flow path. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entering area.

[Feature αA5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αA1 to αA4,
A gaming machine, wherein the passage suppressing means includes a cushioning member that is provided upstream of the ball entry area in the flow path and that buffers an impact between the game ball and the flow path.

According to the feature αA5, even if a game ball traveling along the flow path receives a force in the direction of floating from the flow path due to some factor, the force in the direction of floating from the flow path is buffered by the buffer member, It is possible to suppress floating of the game ball from the channel. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entering area.

The inventions of the features U to αA solve the following problems.

In pachinko machines, slot machines, and other gaming machines, technical improvements are made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and performance, with the aim of improving the enjoyment of games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (eg, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as detecting and deterring fraudulent actions by players and fraudulent modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to improve the enjoyment of the games, reduce the processing load of the gaming machines, simplify control, and provide more sound games.

A configuration obtained by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to feature αA group may be employed. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; an information acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry part; and an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquiring means. machine.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: operation of pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of patterns due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of the stop operation means A game machine comprising: stopping means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the lapse of a predetermined period of time;

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each form described in the Summary of the Invention are used to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. Moreover, if the technical feature is not described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Exhaust port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operating handle 25a... Touch sensor 25b... Weight button 25c... Variable resistor 26... Game ball launch button 30... Game board 31... Guide rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32 ...General winning opening 33...First starting opening 34...Second starting opening 34a...Electric accessory 34b...Electric accessory driving unit 35...Through gate 36...Variable winning Device 36a... Large winning opening 36b... Open/close door 36c... Variable winning drive unit 37... Special figure unit 37a... First symbol display part 37b... Second symbol display part 37c.. .First holding display section 37d...Second holding display section 38...General figure unit 39...Round display section 40...Variable display unit 41...Design display device 41a...Display surface 41aL ...display area 41aS...display area 42...nail 43...outlet 44j...stage 44j2...stage 44k...rising part 44l...left falling part 44m...right side Drop part 44n... Central ball entrance 44o... Central ball outlet 44p... Central drop part 45... Main display part 46... Speaker 47... Various lamps 48... V prize opening 48a... Open/close door 48b... Open/close door driving unit 51... First control unit 52... Second control unit 53... Third control unit 54... Tank 55... Tank rail 56 ...Case rail 57...First variable winning device 57a...First big winning opening 57b...First opening/closing door 57c...First variable winning driving unit 57d...First ball entry prevention Member 58...Second variable prize winning device 58a...Grand prize opening 58a...Second prize winning opening 58b...Second opening/closing door 58c...Second variable prize winning driving section 58d...Second prize winning drive Entry prevention member 59... Convex portion 59a... Magnetic member 60... Main controller 61... Main control board 62... Main side MPU
62x...Main side CPU
63... Main side ROM
64...Main side RAM
64x... flash memory 63a... success/failure table storage area 63b... distribution table storage area 63c... reach determination table storage area 63d... fluctuation time table storage area 63e... stop result table storage Area 63f... Command information storage area 64a... Lottery counter buffer 64b... Pending information storage area 64c... Electrician pending area 64d... Various counter areas 64e... Various flag storage areas 64f. .. First determination processing result storage area 67a... Various detection sensors 70... Payout control device 71... Payout device 80... Launch control device 81... Game ball launching mechanism 85... Power supply device 86 ...Power failure monitoring circuit 90...Sound light emission control device 91...Sound light emission control board 92...Sound and light side MPU
93...Sound and light side ROM
93a... Production pattern table storage area 93b... Fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94... Sound and light side RAM
94a... Various flag storage areas 94b... Various counter areas 94c... Lottery counter areas 96... RTC
100... Display control device 101... Display control board 102... Display side MPU
103... Program ROM
104...Work RAM
106...Character ROM
107... Video RAM
300... Game history management chip 302... Buffer 304... Register 306... Memory for storing data on the number of winning balls 307... Memory for storing calculation execution conditions 307a... Memory for storing execution conditions 308 ...CPU
309... Memory for storing computation results 309a... Memory for storing number of entered balls 309b... Memory for storing entered ball information 320... Inspection machine 321... CPU
328... Display unit 329... Connection cable PA... Game area PC... Winning counter area AE... Execution area Ra... First reservation area Rb... Second reservation area Dm11 to Dm14 , Dm21 to Dm24...Hold display Sync1...First synchronous display area Sync2...Second synchronous display area MA...Main display area SA1...First sub-display area SA2...Second sub-display area Display area Ds1... First reserved display area Ds2... Second reserved display area

Claims (1)

a plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area;
a game value imparting means electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and executing a process for imparting a game value to a game;
a payout means electrically connected to the game value imparting means and executing a payout process for paying out game balls;
a process executing means electrically connected to the game value imparting means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals and executing a predetermined process different from the payout process ;
A gaming machine comprising
The game value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information that is information used in a process for imparting a game value to the game and is referenced for detection by the predetermined detection means;
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference data stored in the first reference information storage means a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on ball entry information, which is information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detecting means, to the processing executing means;
with
The processing execution means is
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value imparting means;
execution means for executing the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage unit that stores processing result information that is information about the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution unit;
with
The game value imparting means and the process execution means are operated by the same power source for the gaming machine,
This game machine is
an effect display means that is visible from the front of the game machine and displays a game-time effect that is executed for each game time, which is one unit of processing for announcing the result of a predetermined lottery process;
means for outputting the processing result information to the effect display means;
with
The processing execution means is configured so as not to be able to rewrite the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means of the game value provision means,
The game value imparting means cannot directly change the processing result information stored in the processing result information storage means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images